C8051F960-B-GMR

C8051F96x Ultra Low Power 128K, LCD MCU Family Ultra Low Power Consumption at 3.6 V - 130 µA/MHz Low-Power Active mode with dc-dc enabled - 120 nA sleep current w/ data retention; POR monitor enabled - 450 nA sleep mode with SmaRTClock (internal LFO) - 600 nA sleep mode with SmaRTClock (ext. crystal) - 2 µs wakeup time; 1.5 µA analog settling time 12-Bit; 16 Ch. Analog-to-Digital Converter - Up to 75 ksps (12-bit mode) or 300 ksps (10-bit mode) - External pin or internal VREF (no ext cap required) - On-chip voltage reference; 0.5x gain allows measuring voltages up to twice the reference voltage - Autonomous burst mode with 16-bit auto-averaging accumulator - Integrated temperature sensor Two Low Current Comparators - Programmable hysteresis and response time - Configurable as wake-up or reset source Internal 6-Bit Current Reference - Up to ±500 µA; source and sink capability - Enhanced resolution via PWM interpolation Integrated LCD Controller - Supports up to 128 segments (32x4) - LCD controller consumes only 400 nA for 32-segment static display - Integrated charge pump for contrast control Metering-Specific Peripherals - DC-DC buck converter allows dynamic voltage scaling for maximum efficiency (250 mW output) - Sleep-mode pulse accumulator with programmable switch, de-bounce and pull-up control; interfaces directly to metering sensor - Data Packet Processing Engine (DPPE) includes hardware AES, DMA, CRC and encoding blocks for acceleration of wireless protocols Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM PCA/WDT DMA Analog Power VDD VDC VREG Digital Power IND DC/DC Buck Converter LCD Charge Pump XTAL1 XTAL2 GND XTAL3 XTAL4 Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator External Oscillator Circuit Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator LCD (up to 4x32) SFR Bus EMIF Pulse Counter Analog Peripherals Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC Rev. 1.0 7/13 VDD VREF Temp Sensor P3-6 Drivers 32 P7 Driver 16 P3.0...P6.7 P7.0/C2D GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration Port 2 Drivers Crossbar Control Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator GNDDC CAP SPI 1 (DMA Enabled) AES Engine SYSCLK P2.0/SCK1 P2.1/MISO1 P2.2/MOSI1 P2.3/NSS1 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 SPI 0 CRC Engine Encoder VBATDC Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5/INT5 P1.6/INT6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder SMBus VBAT Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7 Digital Peripherals 128k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Temperature Range: –40 to +85 °C Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU High-Speed 8051 µC Core - Pipelined instruction architecture; executes 70% of instructions in 1 or 2 system clocks Memory - Up to 128 kB Flash; In-system programmable; Full read/write/erase functionality over supply range - Up to 8 kB internal data RAM Digital Peripherals - 57 or 34 port I/O; All 5 V tolerant with high sink current and programmable drive strength - Hardware SMBus™ (I2C™ Compatible), 2 x SPI™, and UART serial ports available concurrently - Four general purpose 16-bit counter/timers - Programmable 16-bit counter/timer array with six capture/compare modules and watchdog timer Clock Sources - Precision Internal oscillator: 24.5 MHz, 2% accuracy supports UART operation; spread-spectrum mode for reduced EMI - Low power internal oscillator: 20 MHz - External oscillator: Crystal, RC, C, or CMOS Clock - SmaRTClock oscillator: 32 kHz Crystal or 16.4 kHz internal LFO On-Chip Debug - On-chip debug circuitry facilitates full-speed, nonintrusive in-system debug (no emulator required) - Provides 4 breakpoints, single stepping Packages - 76-pin DQFN (6 x 6 mm) - 40-pin QFN (6 x 6 mm) - 80-pin TQFP (12 x 12 mm) CP1, CP1A + - + - Comparators Copyright © 2013 by Silicon Laboratories C8051F96x C8051F96x 2 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table of Contents 1. System Overview ..................................................................................................... 22 1.1. CIP-51™ Microcontroller Core .......................................................................... 28 1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible .............................................................................. 28 1.1.2. Improved Throughput................................................................................ 28 1.1.3. Additional Features ................................................................................... 28 1.2. Port Input/Output ............................................................................................... 29 1.3. Serial Ports ........................................................................................................ 30 1.4. Programmable Counter Array............................................................................ 30 1.5. SAR ADC with 16-bit Auto-Averaging Accumulator and Autonomous Low Power Burst Mode ..................................................................................... 31 1.6. Programmable Current Reference (IREF0)....................................................... 32 1.7. Comparators...................................................................................................... 32 2. Ordering Information ............................................................................................... 34 3. Pinout and Package Definitions ............................................................................. 35 3.1. DQFN-76 Package Specifications ..................................................................... 46 3.1.1. Package Drawing ...................................................................................... 46 3.1.2. Land Pattern.............................................................................................. 47 3.1.3. Soldering Guidelines ................................................................................. 48 3.2. QFN-40 Package Specifications........................................................................ 50 3.3. TQFP-80 Package Specifications...................................................................... 52 3.3.1. Soldering Guidelines ................................................................................. 55 4. Electrical Characteristics ........................................................................................ 56 4.1. Absolute Maximum Specifications..................................................................... 56 4.2. Electrical Characteristics ................................................................................... 57 5. SAR ADC with 16-bit Auto-Averaging Accumulator and Autonomous Low Power Burst Mode........................................................................................... 78 5.1. Output Code Formatting .................................................................................... 78 5.2. Modes of Operation ........................................................................................... 80 5.2.1. Starting a Conversion................................................................................ 80 5.2.2. Tracking Modes......................................................................................... 80 5.2.3. Burst Mode................................................................................................ 82 5.2.4. Settling Time Requirements...................................................................... 83 5.2.5. Gain Setting .............................................................................................. 83 5.3. 8-Bit Mode ......................................................................................................... 84 5.4. 12-Bit Mode ....................................................................................................... 84 5.5. Low Power Mode............................................................................................... 85 5.6. Programmable Window Detector....................................................................... 91 5.6.1. Window Detector In Single-Ended Mode .................................................. 93 5.6.2. ADC0 Specifications ................................................................................. 94 5.7. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer .................................................................................. 95 5.8. Temperature Sensor.......................................................................................... 97 5.8.1. Calibration ................................................................................................. 97 5.9. Voltage and Ground Reference Options ......................................................... 100 Rev. 1.0 2 C8051F96x 5.10. External Voltage Reference........................................................................... 101 5.11. Internal Voltage Reference............................................................................ 101 5.12. Analog Ground Reference............................................................................. 101 5.13. Temperature Sensor Enable ......................................................................... 101 5.14. Voltage Reference Electrical Specifications .................................................. 102 6. Programmable Current Reference (IREF0).......................................................... 103 6.1. PWM Enhanced Mode..................................................................................... 103 6.2. IREF0 Specifications ....................................................................................... 104 7. Comparators........................................................................................................... 105 7.1. Comparator Inputs........................................................................................... 105 7.2. Comparator Outputs ........................................................................................ 106 7.3. Comparator Response Time ........................................................................... 107 7.4. Comparator Hysterisis ..................................................................................... 107 7.5. Comparator Register Descriptions .................................................................. 108 7.6. Comparator0 and Comparator1 Analog Multiplexers ...................................... 112 8. CIP-51 Microcontroller........................................................................................... 115 8.1. Instruction Set.................................................................................................. 116 8.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing .................................................................... 116 8.2. CIP-51 Register Descriptions .......................................................................... 121 9. Memory Organization ............................................................................................ 124 9.1. Program Memory............................................................................................. 124 9.1.1. MOVX Instruction and Program Memory ................................................ 127 9.2. Data Memory ................................................................................................... 127 9.2.1. Internal RAM ........................................................................................... 127 9.2.2. External RAM .......................................................................................... 128 10. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM ....................................... 129 10.1. Accessing XRAM........................................................................................... 129 10.1.1. 16-Bit MOVX Example .......................................................................... 129 10.1.2. 8-Bit MOVX Example ............................................................................ 129 10.2. Configuring the External Memory Interface ................................................... 130 10.3. Port Configuration.......................................................................................... 130 10.4. Multiplexed and Non-multiplexed Selection................................................... 134 10.4.1. Multiplexed Configuration...................................................................... 134 10.4.2. Non-multiplexed Configuration.............................................................. 134 10.5. Memory Mode Selection................................................................................ 135 10.5.1. Internal XRAM Only .............................................................................. 136 10.5.2. Split Mode without Bank Select............................................................. 136 10.5.3. Split Mode with Bank Select.................................................................. 136 10.5.4. External Only......................................................................................... 136 10.6. Timing .......................................................................................................... 137 10.6.1. Non-Multiplexed Mode .......................................................................... 139 10.6.2. Multiplexed Mode .................................................................................. 142 11. Direct Memory Access (DMA0)........................................................................... 146 11.1. DMA0 Architecture ........................................................................................ 147 11.2. DMA0 Arbitration ........................................................................................... 148 3 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 11.2.1. DMA0 Memory Access Arbitration ........................................................ 148 11.2.2. DMA0 Channel Arbitration .................................................................... 148 11.3. DMA0 Operation in Low Power Modes ......................................................... 148 11.4. Transfer Configuration................................................................................... 149 12. Cyclic Redundancy Check Unit (CRC0)............................................................. 160 12.1. 16-bit CRC Algorithm..................................................................................... 160 12.3. Preparing for a CRC Calculation ................................................................... 163 12.4. Performing a CRC Calculation ...................................................................... 163 12.5. Accessing the CRC0 Result .......................................................................... 163 12.6. CRC0 Bit Reverse Feature............................................................................ 167 13. DMA-Enabled Cyclic Redundancy Check Module (CRC1)............................... 168 13.1. Polynomial Specification................................................................................ 168 13.2. Endianness.................................................................................................... 169 13.3. CRC Seed Value ........................................................................................... 170 13.4. Inverting the Final Value................................................................................ 170 13.5. Flipping the Final Value ................................................................................. 170 13.6. Using CRC1 with SFR Access ...................................................................... 171 13.7. Using the CRC1 module with the DMA ......................................................... 171 14. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Peripheral ............................................ 175 14.1. Hardware Description .................................................................................... 176 14.1.1. AES Encryption/Decryption Core .......................................................... 177 14.1.2. Data SFRs............................................................................................. 177 14.1.3. Configuration sfrs .................................................................................. 178 14.1.4. Input Multiplexer.................................................................................... 178 14.1.5. Output Multiplexer ................................................................................. 178 14.1.6. Internal State Machine .......................................................................... 178 14.2. Key Inversion................................................................................................. 179 14.2.1. Key Inversion using DMA...................................................................... 180 14.2.2. Key Inversion using SFRs..................................................................... 181 14.2.3. Extended Key Output Byte Order.......................................................... 182 14.2.4. Using the DMA to unwrap the extended Key ........................................ 183 14.3. AES Block Cipher .......................................................................................... 184 14.4. AES Block Cipher Data Flow......................................................................... 185 14.4.1. AES Block Cipher Encryption using DMA ............................................. 186 14.4.2. AES Block Cipher Encryption using SFRs ............................................ 187 14.5. AES Block Cipher Decryption........................................................................ 188 14.5.1. AES Block Cipher Decryption using DMA............................................. 188 14.5.2. AES Block Cipher Decryption using SFRs............................................ 189 14.6. Block Cipher Modes ...................................................................................... 190 14.6.1. Cipher Block Chaining Mode................................................................. 190 14.6.2. CBC Encryption Initialization Vector Location....................................... 192 14.6.3. CBC Encryption using DMA .................................................................. 192 14.6.4. CBC Decryption .................................................................................... 195 14.6.5. Counter Mode ....................................................................................... 198 14.6.6. CTR Encryption using DMA .................................................................. 200 Rev. 1.0 4 C8051F96x 15. Encoder/Decoder ................................................................................................. 207 15.1. Manchester Encoding.................................................................................... 208 15.2. Manchester Decoding.................................................................................... 209 15.3. Three-out-of-Six Encoding............................................................................ 210 15.4. Three-out-of-Six Decoding ............................................................................ 211 15.5. Encoding/Decoding with SFR Access ........................................................... 212 15.6. Decoder Error Interrupt.................................................................................. 212 15.7. Using the ENC0 module with the DMA.......................................................... 213 16. Special Function Registers................................................................................. 216 16.1. SFR Paging ................................................................................................... 216 16.2. Interrupts and SFR Paging ............................................................................ 216 17. Interrupt Handler.................................................................................................. 232 17.1. Enabling Interrupt Sources ............................................................................ 232 17.2. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors.............................................................. 232 17.3. Interrupt Priorities .......................................................................................... 233 17.4. Interrupt Latency............................................................................................ 233 17.5. Interrupt Register Descriptions ...................................................................... 235 17.6. External Interrupts INT0 and INT1................................................................. 242 18. Flash Memory....................................................................................................... 244 18.1. Programming the Flash Memory ................................................................... 244 18.1.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions .............................................................. 244 18.1.2. Flash Erase Procedure ......................................................................... 244 18.1.3. Flash Write Procedure .......................................................................... 245 18.1.4. Flash Write Optimization ....................................................................... 246 18.2. Non-volatile Data Storage ............................................................................. 247 18.3. Security Options ............................................................................................ 247 18.4. Determining the Device Part Number at Run Time ....................................... 249 18.5. Flash Write and Erase Guidelines ................................................................. 250 18.5.1. VDD Maintenance and the VDD Monitor .............................................. 250 18.5.2. PSWE Maintenance .............................................................................. 251 18.5.3. System Clock ........................................................................................ 251 18.6. Minimizing Flash Read Current ..................................................................... 252 19. Power Management ............................................................................................. 257 19.1. Normal Mode ................................................................................................. 258 19.2. Idle Mode....................................................................................................... 258 19.3. Stop Mode ..................................................................................................... 259 19.4. Low Power Idle Mode .................................................................................... 259 19.5. Suspend Mode .............................................................................................. 263 19.6. Sleep Mode ................................................................................................... 263 19.7. Configuring Wakeup Sources........................................................................ 264 19.8. Determining the Event that Caused the Last Wakeup................................... 264 19.9. Power Management Specifications ............................................................... 268 20. On-Chip DC-DC Buck Converter (DC0).............................................................. 269 20.1. Startup Behavior............................................................................................ 270 20.4. Optimizing Board Layout ............................................................................... 271 5 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 20.5. Selecting the Optimum Switch Size............................................................... 271 20.6. DC-DC Converter Clocking Options .......................................................... 271 20.7. Bypass Mode................................................................................................. 272 20.8. DC-DC Converter Register Descriptions ....................................................... 272 20.9. DC-DC Converter Specifications ................................................................... 276 21. Voltage Regulator (VREG0)................................................................................. 277 21.1. Voltage Regulator Electrical Specifications ................................................... 277 22. Reset Sources ...................................................................................................... 278 22.1. Power-On Reset ............................................................................................ 279 22.2. Power-Fail Reset ........................................................................................... 280 22.3. External Reset ............................................................................................... 283 22.4. Missing Clock Detector Reset ....................................................................... 283 22.5. Comparator0 Reset ....................................................................................... 283 22.6. PCA Watchdog Timer Reset ......................................................................... 283 22.7. Flash Error Reset .......................................................................................... 284 22.8. SmaRTClock (Real Time Clock) Reset ......................................................... 284 22.9. Software Reset .............................................................................................. 284 23. Clocking Sources................................................................................................. 286 23.1. Programmable Precision Internal Oscillator .................................................. 287 23.2. Low Power Internal Oscillator........................................................................ 287 23.3. External Oscillator Drive Circuit..................................................................... 287 23.3.1. External Crystal Mode........................................................................... 287 23.3.2. External RC Mode................................................................................. 289 23.3.3. External Capacitor Mode....................................................................... 290 23.3.4. External CMOS Clock Mode ................................................................. 290 23.4. Special Function Registers for Selecting and Configuring the System Clock ................................................................................................ 291 24. SmaRTClock (Real Time Clock).......................................................................... 295 24.1. SmaRTClock Interface .................................................................................. 296 24.1.1. SmaRTClock Lock and Key Functions.................................................. 297 24.1.2. Using RTC0ADR and RTC0DAT to Access SmaRTClock Internal Registers.................................................................................. 297 24.1.3. SmaRTClock Interface Autoread Feature ............................................. 297 24.1.4. RTC0ADR Autoincrement Feature........................................................ 297 24.2. SmaRTClock Clocking Sources .................................................................... 300 24.2.1. Using the SmaRTClock Oscillator with a Crystal or External CMOS Clock ........................................................................... 300 24.2.2. Using the SmaRTClock Oscillator in Self-Oscillate Mode..................... 301 24.2.3. Using the Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) ........................................... 301 24.2.4. Programmable Load Capacitance......................................................... 301 24.2.5. Automatic Gain Control (Crystal Mode Only) and SmaRTClock Bias Doubling ........................................................................................ 302 24.2.6. Missing SmaRTClock Detector ............................................................. 304 24.2.7. SmaRTClock Oscillator Crystal Valid Detector ..................................... 304 24.3. SmaRTClock Timer and Alarm Function ....................................................... 304 Rev. 1.0 6 C8051F96x 24.3.1. Setting and Reading the SmaRTClock Timer Value ............................. 304 24.3.2. Setting a SmaRTClock Alarm ............................................................... 305 24.3.3. Software Considerations for using the SmaRTClock Timer and Alarm ................................................................................... 305 25. Low-Power Pulse Counter .................................................................................. 312 25.1. Counting Modes ............................................................................................ 313 25.2. Reed Switch Types........................................................................................ 314 25.3. Programmable Pull-Up Resistors .................................................................. 315 25.4. Automatic Pull-Up Resistor Calibration ......................................................... 317 25.5. Sample Rate.................................................................................................. 317 25.6. Debounce ...................................................................................................... 317 25.7. Reset Behavior .............................................................................................. 318 25.8. Wake up and Interrupt Sources..................................................................... 318 25.9. Real-Time Register Access ........................................................................... 319 25.10. Advanced Features ..................................................................................... 319 25.10.1. Quadrature Error ................................................................................. 319 25.10.2. Flutter Detection.................................................................................. 320 26. LCD Segment Driver ............................................................................................ 334 26.1. Configuring the LCD Segment Driver ............................................................ 334 26.2. Mapping Data Registers to LCD Pins............................................................ 335 26.3. LCD Contrast Adjustment.............................................................................. 338 26.3.1. Contrast Control Mode 1 (Bypass Mode).............................................. 338 26.3.2. Contrast Control Mode 2 (Minimum Contrast Mode) ............................ 339 26.3.3. Contrast Control Mode 3 (Constant Contrast Mode)............................. 339 26.3.4. Contrast Control Mode 4 (Auto-Bypass Mode) ..................................... 340 26.4. Adjusting the VBAT Monitor Threshold ......................................................... 344 26.5. Setting the LCD Refresh Rate ....................................................................... 345 26.6. Blinking LCD Segments................................................................................. 346 26.7. Advanced LCD Optimizations........................................................................ 348 27. Port Input/Output ................................................................................................. 351 27.1. Port I/O Modes of Operation.......................................................................... 352 27.1.1. Port Pins Configured for Analog I/O...................................................... 352 27.1.2. Port Pins Configured For Digital I/O...................................................... 352 27.1.3. Interfacing Port I/O to High Voltage Logic............................................. 353 27.1.4. Increasing Port I/O Drive Strength ........................................................ 353 27.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog and Digital Functions............................... 353 27.2.1. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog Functions ........................................ 353 27.2.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Digital Functions.......................................... 354 27.2.3. Assigning Port I/O Pins to External Digital Event Capture Functions ... 354 27.3. Priority Crossbar Decoder ............................................................................. 355 27.4. Port Match ..................................................................................................... 361 27.5. Special Function Registers for Accessing and Configuring Port I/O ............. 363 28. SMBus................................................................................................................... 381 28.1. Supporting Documents .................................................................................. 382 28.2. SMBus Configuration..................................................................................... 382 7 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 28.3. SMBus Operation .......................................................................................... 382 28.3.1. Transmitter Vs. Receiver....................................................................... 383 28.3.2. Arbitration.............................................................................................. 383 28.3.3. Clock Low Extension............................................................................. 383 28.3.4. SCL Low Timeout.................................................................................. 383 28.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout ......................................................... 384 28.4. Using the SMBus........................................................................................... 384 28.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register.............................................................. 384 28.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register .................................................................... 388 28.4.3. Hardware Slave Address Recognition .................................................. 390 28.4.4. Data Register ........................................................................................ 393 28.5. SMBus Transfer Modes................................................................................. 393 28.5.1. Write Sequence (Master) ...................................................................... 393 28.5.2. Read Sequence (Master) ...................................................................... 394 28.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave) ........................................................................ 395 28.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave) ........................................................................ 396 28.6. SMBus Status Decoding................................................................................ 397 29. UART0 ................................................................................................................... 402 29.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation.................................................................. 403 29.2. Operational Modes ........................................................................................ 404 29.2.1. 8-Bit UART ............................................................................................ 404 29.2.2. 9-Bit UART ............................................................................................ 404 29.3. Multiprocessor Communications ................................................................... 405 30. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) ..................................................... 411 30.1. Signal Descriptions........................................................................................ 412 30.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI)................................................................. 412 30.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO)................................................................. 412 30.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK) ................................................................................ 412 30.1.4. Slave Select (NSS) ............................................................................... 412 30.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation ........................................................................ 412 30.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation .......................................................................... 414 30.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources .................................................................................. 415 30.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity .................................................................... 415 30.6. SPI Special Function Registers ..................................................................... 417 32. Timers ................................................................................................................... 444 32.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1 ...................................................................................... 446 32.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer ............................................................... 446 32.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer ............................................................... 447 32.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload..................................... 447 32.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)................................ 448 32.2. Timer 2 .......................................................................................................... 454 32.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 454 32.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 455 32.2.3. Comparator 0/SmaRTClock Capture Mode .......................................... 455 32.3. Timer 3 .......................................................................................................... 460 Rev. 1.0 8 C8051F96x 32.3.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 460 32.3.2. 8-Bit Timers with Auto-Reload .............................................................. 461 32.3.3. SmaRTClock/External Oscillator Capture Mode ................................... 461 33. Programmable Counter Array............................................................................. 466 33.1. PCA Counter/Timer ....................................................................................... 467 33.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources................................................................................. 468 33.3. Capture/Compare Modules ........................................................................... 469 33.3.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode............................................................... 470 33.3.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode.......................................................... 471 33.3.3. High-Speed Output Mode ..................................................................... 472 33.3.4. Frequency Output Mode ....................................................................... 473 33.3.5. 8-Bit, 9-Bit, 10-Bit and 11-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Modes.............. 474 33.3.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode..................................................... 476 33.4. Watchdog Timer Mode .................................................................................. 477 33.4.1. Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................... 477 33.4.2. Watchdog Timer Usage ........................................................................ 478 33.5. Register Descriptions for PCA0..................................................................... 480 34. C2 Interface .......................................................................................................... 486 34.1. C2 Interface Registers................................................................................... 486 34.2. C2 Pin Sharing .............................................................................................. 489 Document Change List ............................................................................................. 490 Contact Information .................................................................................................. 492 9 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x List of Figures Figure 1.1. C8051F960 Block Diagram ................................................................... 23 Figure 1.2. C8051F961 Block Diagram ................................................................... 23 Figure 1.3. C8051F962 Block Diagram ................................................................... 24 Figure 1.4. C8051F963 Block Diagram ................................................................... 24 Figure 1.5. C8051F964 Block Diagram ................................................................... 25 Figure 1.6. C8051F965 Block Diagram ................................................................... 25 Figure 1.7. C8051F966 Block Diagram ................................................................... 26 Figure 1.8. C8051F967 Block Diagram ................................................................... 26 Figure 1.9. C8051F968 Block Diagram ................................................................... 27 Figure 1.10. C8051F969 Block Diagram ................................................................. 27 Figure 1.11. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram ...................................................... 29 Figure 1.12. PCA Block Diagram ............................................................................. 30 Figure 1.13. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................... 31 Figure 1.14. ADC0 Multiplexer Block Diagram ........................................................ 32 Figure 1.15. Comparator 0 Functional Block Diagram ............................................ 33 Figure 1.16. Comparator 1 Functional Block Diagram ............................................ 33 Figure 3.1. DQFN-76 Pinout Diagram (Top View) ................................................... 43 Figure 3.2. QFN-40 Pinout Diagram (Top View) ..................................................... 44 Figure 3.3. TQFP-80 Pinout Diagram (Top View) ................................................... 45 Figure 3.4. DQFN-76 Package Drawing .................................................................. 46 Figure 3.5. DQFN-76 Land Pattern ......................................................................... 47 Figure 3.6. Recomended Inner Via Placement ........................................................ 49 Figure 3.7. Typical QFN-40 Package Drawing ........................................................ 50 Figure 3.8. QFN-40 Landing Diagram ..................................................................... 51 Figure 3.9. TQFP-80 Package Drawing .................................................................. 52 Figure 3.10. TQFP80 Landing Diagram .................................................................. 54 Figure 4.1. Frequency Sensitivity (External CMOS Clock, 25°C) ............................ 64 Figure 4.2. Typical VOH Curves, 1.8–3.6 V ............................................................ 66 Figure 4.3. Typical VOL Curves, 1.8–3.6 V ............................................................. 67 Figure 5.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................... 78 Figure 5.2. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing (BURSTEN = 0) .................................................................................... 81 Figure 5.3. Burst Mode Tracking Example with Repeat Count Set to 4 .................. 82 Figure 5.4. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits ............................................................. 83 Figure 5.5. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Single-Ended Data ................................................................................ 94 Figure 5.6. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Single-Ended Data ................................................................................ 94 Figure 5.7. ADC0 Multiplexer Block Diagram .......................................................... 95 Figure 5.8. Temperature Sensor Transfer Function ................................................ 97 Figure 5.9. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration (VREF = 1.68 V) ..................................................................................... 98 Figure 5.10. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram ................................... 100 Rev. 1.0 10 C8051F96x Figure 7.1. Comparator 0 Functional Block Diagram ............................................ 105 Figure 7.2. Comparator 1 Functional Block Diagram ............................................ 106 Figure 7.3. Comparator Hysteresis Plot ................................................................ 107 Figure 7.4. CPn Multiplexer Block Diagram ........................................................... 112 Figure 8.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram ......................................................................... 115 Figure 9.1. C8051F96x Memory Map .................................................................... 124 Figure 9.2. Flash Program Memory Map ............................................................... 125 Figure 9.3. Address Memory Map for Instruction Fetches ..................................... 126 Figure 10.1. Multiplexed Configuration Example ................................................... 134 Figure 10.2. Non-multiplexed Configuration Example ........................................... 135 Figure 10.3. EMIF Operating Modes ..................................................................... 135 Figure 10.4. Non-multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing ............................................... 139 Figure 10.5. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing ................ 140 Figure 10.6. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing ..................... 141 Figure 10.7. Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing ....................................................... 142 Figure 10.8. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing ........................ 143 Figure 10.9. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing ............................. 144 Figure 11.1. DMA0 Block Diagram ........................................................................ 147 Figure 12.1. CRC0 Block Diagram ........................................................................ 160 Figure 12.2. Bit Reverse Register ......................................................................... 167 Figure 13.1. Polynomial Representation ............................................................... 168 Figure 14.1. AES Peripheral Block Diagram ......................................................... 176 Figure 14.2. Key Inversion Data Flow ................................................................... 179 Figure 14.3. AES Block Cipher Data Flow ............................................................. 185 Figure 14.4. Cipher Block Chaining Mode ............................................................. 190 Figure 14.5. CBC Encryption Data Flow ................................................................ 191 Figure 14.6. CBC Decryption Data Flow ............................................................... 195 Figure 14.7. Counter Mode .................................................................................... 198 Figure 14.8. Counter Mode Data Flow .................................................................. 199 Figure 16.1. SFR Page Stack ................................................................................ 217 Figure 18.1. Flash Security Example ..................................................................... 247 Figure 19.1. C8051F96x Power Distribution .......................................................... 258 Figure 19.2. Clock Tree Distribution ...................................................................... 259 Figure 20.1. Step Down DC-DC Buck Converter Block Diagram .......................... 269 Figure 22.1. Reset Sources ................................................................................... 278 Figure 22.2. Power-On Reset Timing Diagram ..................................................... 279 Figure 23.1. Clocking Sources Block Diagram ...................................................... 286 Figure 23.2. 25 MHz External Crystal Example ..................................................... 288 Figure 24.1. SmaRTClock Block Diagram ............................................................. 295 Figure 24.2. Interpreting Oscillation Robustness (Duty Cycle) Test Results ......... 303 Figure 25.1. Pulse Counter Block Diagram ........................................................... 312 Figure 25.2. Mode Examples ................................................................................. 313 Figure 25.3. Reed Switch Configurations .............................................................. 314 Figure 25.4. Debounce Timing .............................................................................. 318 Figure 25.5. Flutter Example ................................................................................. 320 11 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Figure 26.1. LCD Segment Driver Block Diagram ................................................. 334 Figure 26.2. LCD Data Register to LCD Pin Mapping ........................................... 336 Figure 26.3. Contrast Control Mode 1 ................................................................... 338 Figure 26.4. Contrast Control Mode 2 ................................................................... 339 Figure 26.5. Contrast Control Mode 3 ................................................................... 339 Figure 26.6. Contrast Control Mode 4 ................................................................... 340 Figure 27.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram .................................................... 351 Figure 27.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram .............................................................. 352 Figure 27.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder with No Pins Skipped .............................. 356 Figure 27.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder with Crystal Pins Skipped ....................... 357 Figure 28.1. SMBus Block Diagram ...................................................................... 381 Figure 28.2. Typical SMBus Configuration ............................................................ 382 Figure 28.3. SMBus Transaction ........................................................................... 383 Figure 28.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation ........................................................ 385 Figure 28.5. Typical Master Write Sequence ........................................................ 394 Figure 28.6. Typical Master Read Sequence ........................................................ 395 Figure 28.7. Typical Slave Write Sequence .......................................................... 396 Figure 28.8. Typical Slave Read Sequence .......................................................... 397 Figure 29.1. UART0 Block Diagram ...................................................................... 402 Figure 29.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic ................................................................... 403 Figure 29.3. UART Interconnect Diagram ............................................................. 404 Figure 29.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram .............................................................. 404 Figure 29.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram .............................................................. 405 Figure 29.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram ......................... 406 Figure 30.1. SPI Block Diagram ............................................................................ 411 Figure 30.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram ...................................... 414 Figure 30.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram ......................................................................... 414 Figure 30.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram ......................................................................... 414 Figure 30.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing ....................................................... 416 Figure 30.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0) ................................... 416 Figure 30.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1) ................................... 417 Figure 30.8. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0) ....................................................... 421 Figure 30.9. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1) ....................................................... 421 Figure 30.10. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0) ....................................................... 422 Figure 30.11. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1) ....................................................... 422 Figure 32.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram ................................................................. 447 Figure 32.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram ................................................................. 448 Figure 32.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram ................................................................. 449 Figure 32.4. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram ................................................. 454 Figure 32.5. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram ................................................... 455 Figure 32.6. Timer 2 Capture Mode Block Diagram .............................................. 456 Figure 32.7. Timer 3 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram ................................................. 460 Figure 32.8. Timer 3 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram ................................................... 461 Rev. 1.0 12 C8051F96x Figure 32.9. Timer 3 Capture Mode Block Diagram .............................................. 462 Figure 33.1. PCA Block Diagram ........................................................................... 466 Figure 33.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram ................................................... 468 Figure 33.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram ............................................................ 469 Figure 33.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram ............................................................. 471 Figure 33.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram ................................................. 472 Figure 33.6. PCA High-Speed Output Mode Diagram ........................................... 473 Figure 33.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode ........................................................... 474 Figure 33.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram ........................................................ 475 Figure 33.9. PCA 9, 10 and 11-Bit PWM Mode Diagram ...................................... 476 Figure 33.10. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode ................................................................... 477 Figure 33.11. PCA Module 5 with Watchdog Timer Enabled ................................ 478 Figure 34.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing ...................................................................... 489 13 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x List of Tables Table 2.1. Product Selection Guide ......................................................................... 34 Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x .......................................................... 35 Table 3.2. DQFN-76 Package Dimensions ............................................................. 46 Table 3.3. DQFN-76 Land Pattern Dimensions ....................................................... 47 Table 3.4. Recomended Inner Via Placement Dimensions ..................................... 49 Table 3.5. QFN-40 Package Dimensions ................................................................ 50 Table 3.6. QFN-40 Landing Diagram Dimensions ................................................... 51 Table 3.7. TQFP-80 Package Dimensions .............................................................. 52 Table 3.8. TQFP80 Landing Diagram Dimensions .................................................. 54 Table 4.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................... 56 Table 4.2. Global Electrical Characteristics ............................................................. 57 Table 4.3. Digital Supply Current at VBAT pin with DC-DC Converter Enabled ..... 57 Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled ......................... 58 Table 4.5. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics ..................................................... 65 Table 4.6. Reset Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 68 Table 4.7. Power Management Electrical Specifications ......................................... 69 Table 4.8. Flash Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 69 Table 4.9. Internal Precision Oscillator Electrical Characteristics ........................... 69 Table 4.10. Internal Low-Power Oscillator Electrical Characteristics ...................... 69 Table 4.11. SmaRTClock Characteristics ................................................................ 70 Table 4.12. ADC0 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................ 70 Table 4.13. Temperature Sensor Electrical Characteristics .................................... 71 Table 4.14. Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics ....................................... 72 Table 4.15. IREF0 Electrical Characteristics ........................................................... 73 Table 4.16. Comparator Electrical Characteristics .................................................. 74 Table 4.17. VREG0 Electrical Characteristics ......................................................... 75 Table 4.18. LCD0 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................ 76 Table 4.19. PC0 Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 76 Table 4.20. DC0 (Buck Converter) Electrical Characteristics .................................. 77 Table 5.1. Representative Conversion Times and Energy Consumption for the SAR ADC with 1.65 V High-Speed VREF ................................... 85 Table 8.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................... 117 Table 10.1. EMIF Pinout (C8051F960/2/4/6/8) ...................................................... 131 Table 10.2. AC Parameters for External Memory Interface ................................... 145 Table 12.1. Example 16-bit CRC Outputs ............................................................. 161 Table 12.2. Example 32-bit CRC Outputs ............................................................. 163 Table 14.1. Extended Key Output Byte Order ....................................................... 182 Table 14.2. 192-Bit Key DMA Usage ..................................................................... 183 Table 14.3. 256-bit Key DMA Usage ..................................................................... 183 Table 15.1. Encoder Input and Output Data Sizes ................................................ 207 Table 15.2. Manchester Encoding ......................................................................... 208 Table 15.3. Manchester Decoding ......................................................................... 209 Table 15.4. Three-out-of-Six Encoding Nibble ...................................................... 210 Rev. 1.0 14 C8051F96x Table 15.5. Three-out-of-Six Decoding ................................................................. 211 Table 16.1. SFR Map (0xC0–0xFF) ...................................................................... 222 Table 16.2. SFR Map (0x80–0xBF) ....................................................................... 223 Table 16.3. Special Function Registers ................................................................. 224 Table 17.1. Interrupt Summary .............................................................................. 234 Table 18.1. Flash Security Summary .................................................................... 248 Table 19.1. Power Modes ...................................................................................... 257 Table 20.1. IPeak Inductor Current Limit Settings ................................................. 270 Table 23.1. Recommended XFCN Settings for Crystal Mode ............................... 288 Table 23.2. Recommended XFCN Settings for RC and C modes ......................... 289 Table 24.1. SmaRTClock Internal Registers ......................................................... 296 Table 24.2. SmaRTClock Load Capacitance Settings .......................................... 302 Table 24.3. SmaRTClock Bias Settings ................................................................ 303 Table 25.1. Pull-Up Resistor Current ..................................................................... 315 Table 25.2. Sample Rate Duty-Cycle Multiplier ..................................................... 315 Table 25.3. Pull-Up Duty-Cycle Multiplier .............................................................. 315 Table 25.4. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 250 µs) ............................. 316 Table 25.5. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 500 µs) ............................. 316 Table 25.6. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 1 ms) ............................... 316 Table 25.7. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 2 ms) ................................ 316 Table 26.1. Bit Configurations to select Contrast Control Modes .......................... 338 Table 27.1. Port I/O Assignment for Analog Functions ......................................... 353 Table 27.2. Port I/O Assignment for Digital Functions ........................................... 354 Table 27.3. Port I/O Assignment for External Digital Event Capture Functions .... 354 Table 28.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection .......................................................... 385 Table 28.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times ................................................ 386 Table 28.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN ..................................... 390 Table 28.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1) ................... 391 Table 28.5. SMBus Status Decoding With Hardware ACK Generation Disabled (EHACK = 0) ....................................................................................... 398 Table 28.6. SMBus Status Decoding With Hardware ACK Generation Enabled (EHACK = 1) ....................................................................................... 400 Table 29.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using The Internal 24.5 MHz Oscillator .............................................. 409 Table 29.2. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External 22.1184 MHz Oscillator ......................................... 409 Table 30.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters ............................................................ 423 Table 31.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters ............................................................ 443 Table 32.1. Timer 0 Running Modes ..................................................................... 446 Table 33.1. PCA Timebase Input Options ............................................................. 467 Table 33.2. PCA0CPM and PCA0PWM Bit Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules ................................................................ 469 Table 33.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals1 ................................................... 479 15 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x List of Registers SFR Definition 5.1. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control ................................................................ 86 SFR Definition 5.2. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration ...................................................... 87 SFR Definition 5.3. ADC0AC: ADC0 Accumulator Configuration ................................. 88 SFR Definition 5.4. ADC0PWR: ADC0 Burst Mode Power-Up Time ............................ 89 SFR Definition 5.5. ADC0TK: ADC0 Burst Mode Track Time ....................................... 90 SFR Definition 5.6. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word High Byte ............................................ 91 SFR Definition 5.7. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word Low Byte .............................................. 91 SFR Definition 5.8. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than High Byte ................................... 92 SFR Definition 5.9. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Low Byte .................................... 92 SFR Definition 5.10. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than High Byte ...................................... 93 SFR Definition 5.11. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Low Byte ........................................ 93 SFR Definition 5.12. ADC0MX: ADC0 Input Channel Select ........................................ 96 SFR Definition 5.13. TOFFH: Temperature Sensor Offset High Byte ........................... 99 SFR Definition 5.14. TOFFL: Temperature Sensor Offset Low Byte ............................ 99 SFR Definition 5.15. REF0CN: Voltage Reference Control ........................................ 102 SFR Definition 6.1. IREF0CN: Current Reference Control ......................................... 103 SFR Definition 6.2. IREF0CF: Current Reference Configuration ................................ 104 SFR Definition 7.1. CPT0CN: Comparator 0 Control .................................................. 108 SFR Definition 7.2. CPT0MD: Comparator 0 Mode Selection .................................... 109 SFR Definition 7.3. CPT1CN: Comparator 1 Control .................................................. 110 SFR Definition 7.4. CPT1MD: Comparator 1 Mode Selection .................................... 111 SFR Definition 7.5. CPT0MX: Comparator0 Input Channel Select ............................. 113 SFR Definition 7.6. CPT1MX: Comparator1 Input Channel Select ............................. 114 SFR Definition 8.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte ........................................................ 121 SFR Definition 8.2. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte ....................................................... 121 SFR Definition 8.3. SP: Stack Pointer ......................................................................... 122 SFR Definition 8.4. ACC: Accumulator ....................................................................... 122 SFR Definition 8.5. B: B Register ................................................................................ 122 SFR Definition 8.6. PSW: Program Status Word ........................................................ 123 SFR Definition 9.1. PSBANK: Program Space Bank Select ....................................... 127 SFR Definition 10.1. EMI0CN: External Memory Interface Control ............................ 132 SFR Definition 10.2. EMI0CF: External Memory Configuration .................................. 133 SFR Definition 10.3. EMI0TC: External Memory Timing Control ................................ 138 SFR Definition 11.1. DMA0EN: DMA0 Channel Enable ............................................. 150 SFR Definition 11.2. DMA0INT: DMA0 Full-Length Interrupt ...................................... 151 SFR Definition 11.3. DMA0MINT: DMA0 Mid-Point Interrupt ..................................... 152 SFR Definition 11.4. DMA0BUSY: DMA0 Busy .......................................................... 153 SFR Definition 11.5. DMA0SEL: DMA0 Channel Select for Configuration ................. 154 SFR Definition 11.6. DMA0NMD: DMA Channel Mode .............................................. 155 SFR Definition 11.7. DMA0NCF: DMA Channel Configuration ................................... 156 SFR Definition 11.8. DMA0NBAH: Memory Base Address High Byte ........................ 157 SFR Definition 11.9. DMA0NBAL: Memory Base Address Low Byte ......................... 157 SFR Definition 11.10. DMA0NAOH: Memory Address Offset High Byte .................... 158 Rev. 1.0 16 C8051F96x SFR Definition 11.11. DMA0NAOL: Memory Address Offset Low Byte ..................... 158 SFR Definition 11.12. DMA0NSZH: Transfer Size High Byte ..................................... 159 SFR Definition 11.13. DMA0NSZL: Memory Transfer Size Low Byte ........................ 159 SFR Definition 12.1. CRC0CN: CRC0 Control ........................................................... 164 SFR Definition 12.2. CRC0IN: CRC0 Data Input ........................................................ 165 SFR Definition 12.3. CRC0DAT: CRC0 Data Output .................................................. 165 SFR Definition 12.4. CRC0AUTO: CRC0 Automatic Control ...................................... 166 SFR Definition 12.5. CRC0CNT: CRC0 Automatic Flash Sector Count ..................... 166 SFR Definition 12.6. CRC0FLIP: CRC0 Bit Flip .......................................................... 167 SFR Definition 13.1. CRC1CN: CRC1 Control ........................................................... 172 SFR Definition 13.2. CRC1IN: CRC1 Data IN ............................................................ 173 SFR Definition 13.3. CRC1POLL: CRC1 Polynomial LSB .......................................... 173 SFR Definition 13.4. CRC1POLH: CRC1 Polynomial MSB ........................................ 173 SFR Definition 13.5. CRC1OUTL: CRC1 Output LSB ................................................ 174 SFR Definition 13.6. CRC1OUTH: CRC1 Output MSB .............................................. 174 SFR Definition 14.1. AES0BCFG: AES Block Configuration ...................................... 202 SFR Definition 14.2. AES0DCFG: AES Data Configuration ....................................... 203 SFR Definition 14.3. AES0BIN: AES Block Input ........................................................ 204 SFR Definition 14.4. AES0XIN: AES XOR Input ......................................................... 205 SFR Definition 14.5. AES0KIN: AES Key Input .......................................................... 205 SFR Definition 14.6. AES0YOUT: AES Y Output ....................................................... 206 SFR Definition 15.1. ENC0CN: Encoder Decoder 0 Control ...................................... 214 SFR Definition 15.2. ENC0L: ENC0 Data Low Byte ................................................... 215 SFR Definition 15.3. ENC0M: ENC0 Data Middle Byte .............................................. 215 SFR Definition 15.4. ENC0H: ENC0 Data High Byte .................................................. 215 SFR Definition 16.1. SFRPGCN: SFR Page Control .................................................. 218 SFR Definition 16.2. SFRPAGE: SFR Page ............................................................... 219 SFR Definition 16.3. SFRNEXT: SFR Next ................................................................ 220 SFR Definition 16.4. SFRLAST: SFR Last .................................................................. 221 SFR Definition 17.1. IE: Interrupt Enable .................................................................... 236 SFR Definition 17.2. IP: Interrupt Priority .................................................................... 237 SFR Definition 17.3. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1 ............................................ 238 SFR Definition 17.4. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1 ............................................ 239 SFR Definition 17.5. EIE2: Extended Interrupt Enable 2 ............................................ 240 SFR Definition 17.6. EIP2: Extended Interrupt Priority 2 ............................................ 241 SFR Definition 17.7. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration .............................................. 243 SFR Definition 18.1. DEVICEID: Device Identification ................................................ 249 SFR Definition 18.2. REVID: Revision Identification ................................................... 249 SFR Definition 18.3. PSCTL: Program Store R/W Control ......................................... 253 SFR Definition 18.4. FLKEY: Flash Lock and Key ...................................................... 254 SFR Definition 18.5. FLSCL: Flash Scale ................................................................... 255 SFR Definition 18.6. FLWR: Flash Write Only ............................................................ 255 SFR Definition 18.7. FRBCN: Flash Read Buffer Control ........................................... 256 SFR Definition 19.1. PCLKACT: Peripheral Active Clock Enable ............................... 260 SFR Definition 19.2. PCLKEN: Peripheral Clock Enable ............................................ 261 17 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 19.3. CLKMODE: Clock Mode ............................................................ 262 SFR Definition 19.4. PMU0CF: Power Management Unit Configuration1,2,3 .................... 265 SFR Definition 19.5. PMU0FL: Power Management Unit Flag1,2 ......................................... 266 SFR Definition 19.6. PMU0MD: Power Management Unit Mode ................................ 267 SFR Definition 19.7. PCON: Power Management Control Register ........................... 268 SFR Definition 20.1. DC0CN: DC-DC Converter Control ........................................... 273 SFR Definition 20.2. DC0CF: DC-DC Converter Configuration .................................. 274 SFR Definition 20.3. DC0MD: DC-DC Converter Mode .............................................. 275 SFR Definition 20.4. DC0RDY: DC-DC Converter Ready Indicator ........................... 276 SFR Definition 21.1. REG0CN: Voltage Regulator Control ........................................ 277 SFR Definition 22.1. VDM0CN: VDD Supply Monitor Control .................................... 282 SFR Definition 22.2. RSTSRC: Reset Source ............................................................ 285 SFR Definition 23.1. CLKSEL: Clock Select ............................................................... 291 SFR Definition 23.2. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control .......................................... 292 SFR Definition 23.3. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration ..................................... 293 SFR Definition 23.4. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control ........................................ 294 SFR Definition 24.1. RTC0KEY: SmaRTClock Lock and Key .................................... 298 SFR Definition 24.2. RTC0ADR: SmaRTClock Address ............................................ 298 SFR Definition 24.3. RTC0DAT: SmaRTClock Data .................................................. 299 Internal Register Definition 24.4. RTC0CN: SmaRTClock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Internal Register Definition 24.5. RTC0XCN: SmaRTClock Oscillator Control . . . . . . 307 Internal Register Definition 24.6. RTC0XCF: SmaRTClock Oscillator Configuration . 308 Internal Register Definition 24.7. RTC0CF: SmaRTClock Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 309 Internal Register Definition 24.8. CAPTUREn: SmaRTClock Timer Capture . . . . . . . 310 Internal Register Definition 24.9. ALARM0Bn: SmaRTClock Alarm 0 Match Value . . 310 Internal Register Definition 24.10. ALARM1Bn: SmaRTClock Alarm 1 Match Value . 311 Internal Register Definition 24.11. ALARM2Bn: SmaRTClock Alarm 2 Match Value . 311 SFR Definition 25.1. PC0MD: PC0 Mode Configuration ............................................. 321 SFR Definition 25.2. PC0PCF: PC0 Mode Pull-Up Configuration .............................. 322 SFR Definition 25.3. PC0TH: PC0 Threshold Configuration ....................................... 323 SFR Definition 25.4. PC0STAT: PC0 Status .............................................................. 324 SFR Definition 25.5. PC0DCH: PC0 Debounce Configuration High ........................... 325 SFR Definition 25.6. PC0DCL: PC0 Debounce Configuration Low ............................ 326 SFR Definition 25.7. PC0CTR0H: PC0 Counter 0 High (MSB) .................................. 327 SFR Definition 25.8. PC0CTR0M: PC0 Counter 0 Middle .......................................... 327 SFR Definition 25.9. PC0CTR0L: PC0 Counter 0 Low (LSB) ..................................... 327 SFR Definition 25.10. PC0CTR1H: PC0 Counter 1 High (MSB) ................................ 328 SFR Definition 25.11. PC0CTR1M: PC0 Counter 1 Middle ........................................ 328 SFR Definition 25.12. PC0CTR1L: PC0 Counter 1 Low (LSB) ................................... 328 SFR Definition 25.13. PC0CMP0H: PC0 Comparator 0 High (MSB) .......................... 329 SFR Definition 25.14. PC0CMP0M: PC0 Comparator 0 Middle ................................. 329 SFR Definition 25.15. PC0CMP0L: PC0 Comparator 0 Low (LSB) ............................ 329 SFR Definition 25.16. PC0CMP1H: PC0 Comparator 1 High (MSB) .......................... 330 SFR Definition 25.17. PC0CMP1M: PC0 Comparator 1 Middle ................................. 330 SFR Definition 25.18. PC0CMP1L: PC0 Comparator 1 Low (LSB) ............................ 330 Rev. 1.0 18 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.19. PC0HIST: PC0 History ............................................................ 331 SFR Definition 25.20. PC0INT0: PC0 Interrupt 0 ........................................................ 332 SFR Definition 25.21. PC0INT1: PC0 Interrupt 1 ........................................................ 333 SFR Definition 26.1. LCD0Dn: LCD0 Data ................................................................. 335 SFR Definition 26.2. LCD0CN: LCD0 Control Register .............................................. 337 SFR Definition 26.3. LCD0CNTRST: LCD0 Contrast Adjustment .............................. 341 SFR Definition 26.4. LCD0MSCN: LCD0 Master Control ........................................... 342 SFR Definition 26.5. LCD0MSCF: LCD0 Master Configuration .................................. 343 SFR Definition 26.6. LCD0PWR: LCD0 Power ........................................................... 343 SFR Definition 26.7. LCD0VBMCN: LCD0 VBAT Monitor Control ............................. 344 SFR Definition 26.8. LCD0CLKDIVH: LCD0 Refresh Rate Prescaler High Byte ........ 345 SFR Definition 26.9. LCD0CLKDIVL: LCD Refresh Rate Prescaler Low Byte ........... 345 SFR Definition 26.10. LCD0BLINK: LCD0 Blink Mask ................................................ 346 SFR Definition 26.11. LCD0TOGR: LCD0 Toggle Rate ............................................. 347 SFR Definition 26.12. LCD0CF: LCD0 Configuration ................................................. 348 SFR Definition 26.13. LCD0CHPCN: LCD0 Charge Pump Control ............................ 348 SFR Definition 26.14. LCD0CHPCF: LCD0 Charge Pump Configuration .................. 349 SFR Definition 26.15. LCD0CHPMD: LCD0 Charge Pump Mode .............................. 349 SFR Definition 26.16. LCD0BUFCN: LCD0 Buffer Control ......................................... 349 SFR Definition 26.17. LCD0BUFCF: LCD0 Buffer Configuration ............................... 350 SFR Definition 26.18. LCD0BUFMD: LCD0 Buffer Mode ........................................... 350 SFR Definition 26.19. LCD0VBMCF: LCD0 VBAT Monitor Configuration .................. 350 SFR Definition 27.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0 .......................................... 358 SFR Definition 27.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1 .......................................... 359 SFR Definition 27.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2 .......................................... 360 SFR Definition 27.4. P0MASK: Port0 Mask Register .................................................. 361 SFR Definition 27.5. P0MAT: Port0 Match Register ................................................... 361 SFR Definition 27.6. P1MASK: Port1 Mask Register .................................................. 362 SFR Definition 27.7. P1MAT: Port1 Match Register ................................................... 362 SFR Definition 27.8. P0: Port0 .................................................................................... 364 SFR Definition 27.9. P0SKIP: Port0 Skip .................................................................... 364 SFR Definition 27.10. P0MDIN: Port0 Input Mode ...................................................... 365 SFR Definition 27.11. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode ............................................... 365 SFR Definition 27.12. P0DRV: Port0 Drive Strength .................................................. 366 SFR Definition 27.13. P1: Port1 .................................................................................. 366 SFR Definition 27.14. P1SKIP: Port1 Skip .................................................................. 367 SFR Definition 27.15. P1MDIN: Port1 Input Mode ...................................................... 367 SFR Definition 27.16. P1MDOUT: Port1 Output Mode ............................................... 368 SFR Definition 27.17. P1DRV: Port1 Drive Strength .................................................. 368 SFR Definition 27.18. P2: Port2 .................................................................................. 369 SFR Definition 27.19. P2SKIP: Port2 Skip .................................................................. 369 SFR Definition 27.20. P2MDIN: Port2 Input Mode ...................................................... 370 SFR Definition 27.21. P2MDOUT: Port2 Output Mode ............................................... 370 SFR Definition 27.22. P2DRV: Port2 Drive Strength .................................................. 371 SFR Definition 27.23. P3: Port3 .................................................................................. 371 19 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.24. P3MDIN: Port3 Input Mode ...................................................... 372 SFR Definition 27.25. P3MDOUT: Port3 Output Mode ............................................... 372 SFR Definition 27.26. P3DRV: Port3 Drive Strength .................................................. 373 SFR Definition 27.27. P4: Port4 .................................................................................. 373 SFR Definition 27.28. P4MDIN: Port4 Input Mode ...................................................... 374 SFR Definition 27.29. P4MDOUT: Port4 Output Mode ............................................... 374 SFR Definition 27.30. P4DRV: Port4 Drive Strength .................................................. 375 SFR Definition 27.31. P5: Port5 .................................................................................. 375 SFR Definition 27.32. P5MDIN: Port5 Input Mode ...................................................... 376 SFR Definition 27.33. P5MDOUT: Port5 Output Mode ............................................... 376 SFR Definition 27.34. P5DRV: Port5 Drive Strength .................................................. 377 SFR Definition 27.35. P6: Port6 .................................................................................. 377 SFR Definition 27.36. P6MDIN: Port6 Input Mode ...................................................... 378 SFR Definition 27.37. P6MDOUT: Port6 Output Mode ............................................... 378 SFR Definition 27.38. P6DRV: Port6 Drive Strength .................................................. 379 SFR Definition 27.39. P7: Port7 .................................................................................. 379 SFR Definition 27.40. P7MDOUT: Port7 Output Mode ............................................... 380 SFR Definition 27.41. P7DRV: Port7 Drive Strength .................................................. 380 SFR Definition 28.1. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration ...................................... 387 SFR Definition 28.2. SMB0CN: SMBus Control .......................................................... 389 SFR Definition 28.3. SMB0ADR: SMBus Slave Address ............................................ 391 SFR Definition 28.4. SMB0ADM: SMBus Slave Address Mask .................................. 392 SFR Definition 28.5. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data ............................................................ 393 SFR Definition 29.1. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control .................................................... 407 SFR Definition 29.2. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer .................................. 408 SFR Definition 30.1. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration ................................................... 418 SFR Definition 30.2. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control ............................................................... 419 SFR Definition 30.3. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate ....................................................... 420 SFR Definition 30.4. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data ................................................................. 420 SFR Definition 31.1. SPI1CFG: SPI1 Configuration ................................................... 438 SFR Definition 31.2. SPI1CN: SPI1 Control ............................................................... 439 SFR Definition 31.3. SPI1CKR: SPI1 Clock Rate ....................................................... 440 SFR Definition 31.4. SPI1DAT: SPI1 Data ................................................................. 440 SFR Definition 32.1. CKCON: Clock Control .............................................................. 445 SFR Definition 32.2. TCON: Timer Control ................................................................. 450 SFR Definition 32.3. TMOD: Timer Mode ................................................................... 451 SFR Definition 32.4. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte ............................................................... 452 SFR Definition 32.5. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte ............................................................... 452 SFR Definition 32.6. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte ............................................................. 453 SFR Definition 32.7. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte ............................................................. 453 SFR Definition 32.8. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control ......................................................... 457 SFR Definition 32.9. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte .......................... 458 SFR Definition 32.10. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte ...................... 458 SFR Definition 32.11. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte ....................................................... 459 SFR Definition 32.12. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte ....................................................... 459 Rev. 1.0 20 C8051F96x SFR Definition 32.13. TMR3CN: Timer 3 Control ....................................................... 463 SFR Definition 32.14. TMR3RLL: Timer 3 Reload Register Low Byte ........................ 464 SFR Definition 32.15. TMR3RLH: Timer 3 Reload Register High Byte ...................... 464 SFR Definition 32.16. TMR3L: Timer 3 Low Byte ....................................................... 465 SFR Definition 32.17. TMR3H Timer 3 High Byte ....................................................... 465 SFR Definition 33.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control .............................................................. 480 SFR Definition 33.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode ................................................................ 481 SFR Definition 33.3. PCA0PWM: PCA PWM Configuration ....................................... 482 SFR Definition 33.4. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode .............................. 483 SFR Definition 33.5. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte ...................................... 484 SFR Definition 33.6. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte ..................................... 484 SFR Definition 33.7. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte ............................. 485 SFR Definition 33.8. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte ........................... 485 C2 Register Definition 34.1. C2ADD: C2 Address ...................................................... 486 C2 Register Definition 34.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID ............................................... 487 C2 Register Definition 34.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID .................................................. 487 C2 Register Definition 34.4. FPCTL: C2 Flash Programming Control ........................ 488 C2 Register Definition 34.5. FPDAT: C2 Flash Programming Data ............................ 488 21 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 1. System Overview C8051F96x devices are fully integrated mixed-signal system-on-a-chip MCUs. Highlighted features are listed below. Refer to Table 2.1 for specific product feature selection and part ordering numbers.               Power efficient on-chip dc-dc buck converter High-speed pipelined 8051-compatible microcontroller core (up to 25 MIPS) In-system, full-speed, non-intrusive debug interface (on-chip) True 10-bit 300 ksps, or 12-bit 75 ksps single-ended ADC with 16 external analog inputs and 4 internal inputs such as various power supply voltages and the temperature sensor 6-bit programmable current reference Precision programmable 24.5 MHz internal oscillator with spread spectrum technology 128, 64, 32, or 16 kB of on-chip flash memory 8448 or 4352 bytes of on-chip RAM Up to 128 segment LCD driver SMBus/I2C, enhanced UART, and two enhanced SPI serial interfaces implemented in hardware Four general-purpose 16-bit timers Programmable counter/timer array (PCA) with six capture/compare modules and watchdog timer function Hardware AES, DMA, and pulse counter On-chip power-on reset, VDD monitor, and temperature sensor  Two on-chip voltage comparators  57 or 34 Port I/O With on-chip power-on reset, VDD monitor, watchdog timer, and clock oscillator, the C8051F96x devices are truly standalone system-on-a-chip solutions. The flash memory can be reprogrammed even in-circuit, providing non-volatile data storage, and also allowing field upgrades of the 8051 firmware. User software has complete control of all peripherals, and may individually shut down any or all peripherals for power savings. The on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) Development Interface allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed, in-circuit debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug logic supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, setting breakpoints, single stepping, run and halt commands. All analog and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging using C2. The two C2 interface pins can be shared with user functions, allowing in-system debugging without occupying package pins. Each device is specified for 1.8 to 3.8 V operation over the industrial temperature range (–40 to +85 °C). The Port I/O and RST pins are tolerant of input signals up to VIO + 2.0 V. The C8051F960/2/4/6/8 are available in a 76-pin DQFN package and an 80-pin TQFP package. The C8051F961/3/5/7/9 are available in a 40-pin QFN package. All package options are lead-free and RoHS compliant. See Table 2.1 for ordering information. Block diagrams are included in Figure 1.1 through Figure 1.16. Rev. 1.0 22 C8051F96x Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 VLCD LCD Charge Pump Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit XTAL2 GND XTAL4 Internal External VREF VREF VDD VREF Temp Sensor A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator XTAL3 EMIF Pulse Counter XTAL1 Port 2 Drivers LCD (up to 4x32) SFR Bus Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator GNDDC P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 128k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU P3-6 Drivers 32 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P6.7 P7.0/C2D VIO GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A VIORF + - + - Comparators Figure 1.1. C8051F960 Block Diagram Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 GNDDC VLCD LCD Charge Pump XTAL1 LCD (up to 4x32) XTAL2 GND XTAL3 XTAL4 SFR Bus EMIF Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator Pulse Counter Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC VDD VREF Temp Sensor GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A + - + - Comparators Figure 1.2. C8051F961 Block Diagram 23 Port 2 Drivers P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 128k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU Rev. 1.0 P3-4 Drivers 8 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P4.0 P7.0/C2D C8051F96x Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Port 2 Drivers P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Digital Peripherals 128k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 Crossbar Control AES Engine Encoder VBATDC IND DC/DC “Buck” Converter SYSCLK Pulse Counter Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit XTAL1 XTAL2 XTAL4 Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator XTAL3 EMIF Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator GNDDC GND SFR Bus VDD VREF Temp Sensor P3-6 Drivers 32 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P6.7 P7.0/C2D VIO GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A VIORF + - + - Comparators Figure 1.3. C8051F962 Block Diagram Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Port 2 Drivers P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Digital Peripherals 128k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 Crossbar Control AES Engine Encoder VBATDC IND DC/DC “Buck” Converter GNDDC XTAL1 XTAL2 GND XTAL3 XTAL4 SYSCLK SFR Bus EMIF Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator Pulse Counter Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC P3-4 Drivers 8 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P4.0 P7.0/C2D GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration VDD VREF Temp Sensor CP1, CP1A + - + - Comparators Figure 1.4. C8051F963 Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 24 C8051F96x Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 VLCD LCD Charge Pump Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit XTAL2 GND XTAL4 Internal External VREF VREF VDD VREF Temp Sensor A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator XTAL3 EMIF Pulse Counter XTAL1 Port 2 Drivers LCD (up to 4x32) SFR Bus Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator GNDDC P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 64k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU P3-6 Drivers 32 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P6.7 P7.0/C2D VIO GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A VIORF + - + - Comparators Figure 1.5. C8051F964 Block Diagram Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 GNDDC VLCD LCD Charge Pump XTAL1 LCD (up to 4x32) XTAL2 GND XTAL3 XTAL4 SFR Bus EMIF Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator Pulse Counter Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC VDD VREF Temp Sensor GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A + - + - Comparators Figure 1.6. C8051F965 Block Diagram 25 Port 2 Drivers P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 64k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU Rev. 1.0 P3-4 Drivers 8 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P4.0 P7.0/C2D C8051F96x Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 VLCD LCD Charge Pump Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit XTAL2 GND XTAL4 Internal External VREF VREF VDD VREF Temp Sensor A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator XTAL3 EMIF Pulse Counter XTAL1 Port 2 Drivers LCD (up to 4x32) SFR Bus Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator GNDDC P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 32k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU P3-6 Drivers 32 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P6.7 P7.0/C2D VIO GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A VIORF + - + - Comparators Figure 1.7. C8051F966 Block Diagram Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 8092 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 GNDDC VLCD LCD Charge Pump XTAL1 LCD (up to 4x32) XTAL2 GND XTAL3 XTAL4 SFR Bus EMIF Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator Pulse Counter Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC VDD VREF Temp Sensor P3-4 Drivers 8 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P4.0 P7.0/C2D GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration Port 2 Drivers P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 32k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU CP1, CP1A + - + - Comparators Figure 1.8. C8051F967 Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 26 C8051F96x Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 4096 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 VLCD LCD Charge Pump Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit XTAL2 GND XTAL4 Internal External VREF VREF VDD VREF Temp Sensor A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator XTAL3 EMIF Pulse Counter XTAL1 Port 2 Drivers LCD (up to 4x32) SFR Bus Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator GNDDC P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 16k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU P3-6 Drivers 32 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P6.7 P7.0/C2D VIO GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A VIORF + - + - Comparators Figure 1.9. C8051F968 Block Diagram Wake Reset C2CK/RST Debug / Programming Hardware VBAT UART 256 Byte SRAM Timers 0, 1, 2, 3 4096 Byte XRAM VDD VDC VREG Analog Power VREG Digital Power DC/DC “Buck” Converter DMA SMBus CRC Engine SPI 0,1 GNDDC VLCD LCD Charge Pump XTAL1 LCD (up to 4x32) XTAL2 GND XTAL3 XTAL4 SFR Bus EMIF Precision 24.5 MHz Oscillator Pulse Counter Low Power 20 MHz Oscillator Analog Peripherals External Oscillator Circuit Enhanced smaRTClock Oscillator Internal External VREF VREF A M U X 12-bit 75ksps ADC VDD VREF Temp Sensor GND CP0, CP0A System Clock Configuration CP1, CP1A + - + - Comparators Figure 1.10. C8051F969 Block Diagram 27 Port 2 Drivers P2.0 P2.1 P2.2 P2.3 P2.4 P2.5 P2.6 P2.7 Crossbar Control AES Engine SYSCLK Port 1 Drivers P1.0/PC0 P1.1/PC1 P1.2/XTAL3 P1.3/XTAL4 P1.4 P1.5 P1.6 P1.7 Priority Crossbar Decoder PCA/ WDT Encoder VBATDC IND Port 0 Drivers P0.0/VREF P0.1/AGND P0.2/XTAL1 P0.3/XTAL2 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P0.6/CNVSTR P0.7/IREF0 Digital Peripherals 16k Byte ISP Flash Program Memory C2D VBAT Port I/O Configuration CIP-51 8051 Controller Core Power On Reset/PMU Rev. 1.0 P3-4 Drivers 8 P7 Driver 1 P3.0...P4.0 P7.0/C2D C8051F96x 1.1. CIP-51™ Microcontroller Core 1.1.1. Fully 8051 Compatible The C8051F96x family utilizes Silicon Labs' proprietary CIP-51 microcontroller core. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop software. The CIP-51 core offers all the peripherals included with a standard 8052. 1.1.2. Improved Throughput The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the standard 8051 architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system clock cycles to execute with a maximum system clock of 12–24 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with only four instructions taking more than four system clock cycles. The CIP-51 has a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that require each execution time. Clocks to Execute 1 2 2/3 3 3/4 4 4/5 5 8 Number of Instructions 26 50 5 14 7 3 1 2 1 With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 25 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 25 MIPS. 1.1.3. Additional Features The C8051F96x SoC family includes several key enhancements to the CIP-51 core and peripherals to improve performance and ease of use in end applications. The extended interrupt handler provides multiple interrupt sources into the CIP-51 allowing numerous analog and digital peripherals to interrupt the controller. An interrupt driven system requires less intervention by the MCU, giving it more effective throughput. The extra interrupt sources are very useful when building multi-tasking, real-time systems. Eight reset sources are available: power-on reset circuitry (POR), an on-chip VDD monitor (forces reset when power supply voltage drops below safe levels), a watchdog timer (WDT), a missing clock detector, SmaRTClock oscillator fail or alarm, a voltage level detection from Comparator0, a forced software reset, an external reset pin, and an illegal flash access protection circuit. Each reset source except for the POR, reset input pin, or flash error may be disabled by the user in software. The WDT may be permanently disabled in software after a power-on reset during MCU initialization. The internal oscillator factory calibrated to 24.5 MHz and is accurate to ±2% over the full temperature and supply range. The internal oscillator period can also be adjusted by user firmware. An additional 20 MHz low power oscillator is also available which facilitates low-power operation. An external oscillator drive circuit is included, allowing an external crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, RC, or CMOS clock source to generate the system clock. If desired, the system clock source may be switched on-the-fly between both internal and external oscillator circuits. An external oscillator can also be extremely useful in low power applications, allowing the MCU to run from a slow (power saving) source, while periodically switching to the fast (up to 25 MHz) internal oscillator as needed. Rev. 1.0 28 C8051F96x 1.2. Port Input/Output Digital and analog resources are available through 57 I/O pins (C8051F960/2/4/6/8) or 34 I/O pins (C8051F961/3/5/7/9). Port pins are organized as eight byte-wide ports. Port pins can be defined as digital or analog I/O. Digital I/O pins can be assigned to one of the internal digital resources or used as general purpose I/O (GPIO). Analog I/O pins are used by the internal analog resources. P7.0 can be used as GPIO and is shared with the C2 Interface Data signal (C2D). See Section “34. C2 Interface” on page 486 for more details. The designer has complete control over which digital and analog functions are assigned to individual port pins. This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the use of a Priority Crossbar Decoder. See Section “27. Port Input/Output” on page 351 for more information on the Crossbar. For Port I/Os configured as push-pull outputs, current is sourced from the VIO, VIORF, or VBAT supply pin. Port I/Os used for analog functions can operate up to the supply voltage. See Section “27. Port Input/Output” on page 351 for more information on Port I/O operating modes and the electrical specifications chapter for detailed electrical specifications. Port Match P0MASK, P0MAT P1MASK, P1MAT Highest Priority 2 UART (Internal Digital Signals) Priority Decoder PnMDOUT, PnMDIN Registers 8 8 4 SPI0 SPI1 P1 I/O Cells SMBus 8 CP0 CP1 Outputs 4 Digital Crossbar 8 SYSCLK 7 2 T0, T1 8 8 8 P0 (Port Latches) P0 I/O Cells 8 P6 8 (P6.0-P6.7) 1 P7 1 (P7.0) To Analog Peripherals (ADC0, CP0, and CP1 inputs, VREF, IREF0, AGND) P2 I/O Cells P3 I/O Cells P4 I/O Cells P5 I/O Cells P0.0 P0.7 P1.0 P1.7 Rev. 1.0 P2.0 P2.7 P3.0 P3.7 P4.0 P4.7 P5.0 P5.7 P6.0 P6 I/O Cells P6.7 P7 P7.0 To EMIF Figure 1.11. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram 29 External Interrupts EX0 and EX1 2 PCA Lowest Priority XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, PnSKIP Registers To LCD C8051F96x 1.3. Serial Ports The C8051F96x Family includes an SMBus/I2C interface, a full-duplex UART with enhanced baud rate configuration, and two Enhanced SPI interfaces. Each of the serial buses is fully implemented in hardware and makes extensive use of the CIP-51's interrupts, thus requiring very little CPU intervention. 1.4. Programmable Counter Array An on-chip Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) is included in addition to the four 16-bit general purpose counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer time base with six programmable capture/compare modules. The PCA clock is derived from one of six sources: the system clock divided by 12, the system clock divided by 4, Timer 0 overflows, an External Clock Input (ECI), the system clock, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. Each capture/compare module can be configured to operate in a variety of modes: edge-triggered capture, software timer, high-speed output, pulse width modulator (8, 9, 10, 11, or 16-bit), or frequency output. Additionally, Capture/Compare Module 5 offers watchdog timer (WDT) capabilities. Following a system reset, Module 5 is configured and enabled in WDT mode. The PCA Capture/Compare Module I/O and External Clock Input may be routed to Port I/O via the Digital Crossbar. SYSCLK /12 SYSCLK /4 Timer 0 Overflow ECI PCA CLOCK MUX 16 -Bit Counter/Timer SYSCLK External Clock /8 Capture/ Compare Module 0 Capture/ Compare Module 1 Capture/ Compare Module 2 Capture/ Compare Module 3 Capture/ Compare Module 4 Capture/ Compare Module5 / WDT CEX5 CEX4 CEX3 CEX2 CEX1 CEX0 ECI Crossbar Port I/O Figure 1.12. PCA Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 30 C8051F96x 1.5. SAR ADC with 16-bit Auto-Averaging Accumulator and Autonomous Low Power Burst Mode The ADC0 on C8051F96x devices is a 300 ksps, 10-bit or 75 ksps, 12-bit successive-approximation-register (SAR) ADC with integrated track-and-hold and programmable window detector. ADC0 also has an autonomous low power Burst Mode which can automatically enable ADC0, capture and accumulate samples, then place ADC0 in a low power shutdown mode without CPU intervention. It also has a 16-bit accumulator that can automatically oversample and average the ADC results. See Section “5.4. 12-Bit Mode” on page 84 for more details on using the ADC in 12-bit mode. The ADC is fully configurable under software control via Special Function Registers. The ADC0 operates in single-ended mode and may be configured to measure various different signals using the analog multiplexer described in Section “5.7. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer” on page 95. The voltage reference for the ADC is selected as described in Section “5.9. Voltage and Ground Reference Options” on page 100. AD0EN BURSTEN AD0INT AD0BUSY AD0WINT AD0CM2 AD0CM1 AD0CM0 ADC0CN VDD Start Conversion ADC0TK Burst Mode Logic AIN+ ADC AD0SC4 AD0SC3 AD0SC2 AD0SC1 AD0SC0 AD08BE AD0TM AMP0GN SYSCLK REF 16-Bit Accumulator ADC0H From AMUX0 10/12-Bit SAR ADC0LTH ADC0LTL ADC0CF ADC0GTH ADC0GTL AD0WINT 32 Figure 1.13. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram 31 AD0BUSY (W) Timer 0 Overflow Timer 2 Overflow Timer 3 Overflow CNVSTR Input ADC0L ADC0PWR 000 001 010 011 100 Rev. 1.0 Window Compare Logic C8051F96x AD0MX4 AD0MX3 AD0MX2 AD0MX1 AM0MX0 ADC0MX P0.0 Programmable Attenuator AIN+ P2.6* AMUX ADC0 Temp Sensor VBAT Gain = 0. 5 or 1 Digital Supply VDD/DC+ *P1.7-P2. 6 only available as inputs on 32- pin packages Figure 1.14. ADC0 Multiplexer Block Diagram 1.6. Programmable Current Reference (IREF0) C8051F96x devices include an on-chip programmable current reference (source or sink) with two output current settings: low power mode and high current mode. The maximum current output in low power mode is 63 µA (1 µA steps) and the maximum current output in high current mode is 504 µA (8 µA steps). 1.7. Comparators C8051F96x devices include two on-chip programmable voltage comparators: Comparator 0 (CPT0) which is shown in Figure 1.15; Comparator 1 (CPT1) which is shown in Figure 1.16. The two comparators operate identically but may differ in their ability to be used as reset or wake-up sources. See Section “22. Reset Sources” on page 278 and the Section “19. Power Management” on page 257 for details on reset sources and low power mode wake-up sources, respectively. The Comparator offers programmable response time and hysteresis, an analog input multiplexer, and two outputs that are optionally available at the Port pins: a synchronous “latched” output (CP0, CP1), or an asynchronous “raw” output (CP0A, CP1A). The asynchronous CP0A signal is available even when the system clock is not active. This allows the Comparator to operate and generate an output when the device is in some low power modes. The comparator inputs may be connected to Port I/O pins or to other internal signals. Port pins may also be used to directly sense capacitive touch switches. See Application Note AN338 for details on Capacitive Touch Switch sensing. Rev. 1.0 32 CPT0CN C8051F96x CP0EN CP0OUT CP0RIF CP0FIF VDD CP0HYP1 CP0HYP0 CP0HYN1 CP0 Interrupt CP0HYN0 CPT0MD Analog Input Multiplexer CP0FIE CP0RIE CP0MD1 CP0MD0 Px.x CP0 Rising-edge CP0 + CP0 Falling-edge Interrupt Logic Px.x CP0 + SET D - CLR Q D Q SET CLR Q Q Px.x Crossbar (SYNCHRONIZER) GND CP0 - CP0A (ASYNCHRONOUS) Reset Decision Tree Px.x Figure 1.15. Comparator 0 Functional Block Diagram CPT0CN CP1EN CP1OUT CP1RIF VDD CP1FIF CP1HYP1 CP1 Interrupt CP1HYP0 CP1HYN1 CP1HYN0 CPT0MD Analog Input Multiplexer CP1FIE CP1RIE CP1MD1 CP1MD0 Px.x CP1 Rising-edge CP1 + CP1 Falling-edge Interrupt Logic Px.x CP1 + D - SET CLR Q Q D SET CLR Q Q Px.x Crossbar (SYNCHRONIZER) CP1 - GND (ASYNCHRONOUS) Reset Decision Tree Px.x Figure 1.16. Comparator 1 Functional Block Diagram 33 Rev. 1.0 CP1A C8051F96x 2. Ordering Information AES 128, 192, 256 Encryption LCD Segments (4-MUX) SmaRTClock Real Time Clock SMBus/I2C UART Enhanced SPI Timers (16-bit) PCA Channels 10/12-bit 300/75 ksps ADC channels with internal VREF and temp sensor Analog Comparators Package 128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 DQFN-76 (6x6) C8051F960-B-GQ 25 128 8448 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 TQFP80 (12x12) C8051F961-B-GM 25 128 8448 34  36  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 QFN-40 (6x6) C8051F962-B-GM 25 128 8448 57  —  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 DQFN-76 (6x6) C8051F962-B-GQ 25 128 8448 57  —  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 TQFP80 (12x12) C8051F963-B-GM 25 128 8448 34  —  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 QFN-40 (6x6) C8051F964-B-GM 25 64 8448 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 DQFN-76 (6x6) C8051F964-B-GQ 25 64 8448 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 TQFP80 (12x12) C8051F965-B-GM 25 64 8448 34  36  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 QFN-40 (6x6) C8051F966-B-GM 25 32 8448 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 DQFN-76 (6x6) C8051F966-B-GQ 25 32 8448 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 TQFP80 (12x12) C8051F967-B-GM 25 32 8448 34  36  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 QFN-40 (6x6) C8051F968-B-GM 25 16 4352 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 DQFN-76 (6x6) C8051F968-B-GQ 25 16 4352 57  128  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 TQFP80 (12x12) C8051F969-B-GM 25 16 4352 34  36  1 1 2 4 6 16 2 QFN-40 (6x6) RAM (bytes)  Flash Memory (kB) 25 128 8448 57 MIPS (Peak) C8051F960-B-GM Ordering Part Number Digital Port I/Os Table 2.1. Product Selection Guide All packages are Lead-free (RoHS Compliant). Rev A not recommended for new designs. Rev. 1.0 34 C8051F96x 35 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 3. Pinout and Package Definitions Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x Name Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 Type Description VBAT A5 8 5 P In Battery Supply Voltage. Must be 1.8 to 3.8 V. VBATDC A6 10 5 P In DC0 Input Voltage. Must be 1.8 to 3.8 V. VDC A8 14 8 P In Alternate Power Supply Voltage. Must be 1.8 to 3.6 V. This supply voltage must always be ≤ VBAT. Software may select this supply voltage to power the digital logic. P Out Positive output of the dc-dc converter. A 1 µF to 10 µF ceramic capacitor is required on this pin when using the dc-dc converter. This pin can supply power to external devices when the dc-dc converter is enabled. DC-DC converter return current path. This pin is typically tied to the ground plane. GNDDC A 12 7 P In GND B6 13,64, 66,68 7 G IND B5 11 6 P In DC-DC Inductor Pin. This pin requires a 560 nH inductor to VDC if the dc-dc converter is used. VIO B4 9 5 P In I/O Power Supply for P0.0–P1.4 and P2.4–P7.0 pins. This supply voltage must always be ≤ VBAT. VIORF B7 15 8 P In I/O Power Supply for P1.5–P2.3 pins. This supply voltage must always be ≤ VBAT. RST/ A9 16 9 D I/O Device Reset. Open-drain output of internal POR or VDD monitor. An external source can initiate a system reset by driving this pin low for at least 15 µs. A 1 kΩ to 5 kΩ pullup to VDD is recommended. See Reset Sources Section for a complete description. C2CK P7.0/ D I/O A10 17 10 C2D VLCD A32 61 32 Required Ground. Clock signal for the C2 Debug Interface. D I/O Port 7.0. This pin can only be used as GPIO. The Crossbar cannot route signals to this pin and it cannot be configured as an analog input. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. D I/O Bi-directional data signal for the C2 Debug Interface. P I/O LCD Power Supply. This pin requires a 10 µF capacitor to stabilize the charge pump. Rev. 1.0 35 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name P0.0 Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 A4 6 4 A3 4 3 Description D I/O or Port 0.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete A In description. A In A Out VREF P0.1 Type External VREF Input. Internal VREF Output. External VREF decoupling capacitors are recommended. See ADC0 Section for details. D I/O or Port 0.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In G AGND Optional Analog Ground. See ADC0 Section for details. P0.2 A2 2 2 D I/O or Port 0.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In A In XTAL1 External Clock Input. This pin is the external oscillator return for a crystal or resonator. See Oscillator Section. P0.3 A1 1 1 D I/O or Port 0.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In A Out XTAL2 D In A In P0.4 A40 79 40 External Clock Output. This pin is the excitation driver for an external crystal or resonator. External Clock Input. This pin is the external clock input in external CMOS clock mode. External Clock Input. This pin is the external clock input in capacitor or RC oscillator configurations. See Oscillator Section for complete details. D I/O or Port 0.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In D Out TX UART TX Pin. See Port I/O Section. P0.5 RX A39 78 39 D I/O or Port 0.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In D In UART RX Pin. See Port I/O Section. 36 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name P0.6 Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 A38 76 38 Type Description D I/O or Port 0.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete A In description. D In CNVSTR External Convert Start Input for ADC0. See ADC0 section for a complete description. P0.7 A37 74 37 D I/O or Port 0.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In A Out IREF0 Output. See IREF Section for complete description. A36 72 36 D I/O or Port 1.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In IREF0 P1.0 P1.1 A35 70 35 A34 67 34 Pulse Counter 1. D I/O or Port 1.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In SmaRTClock Oscillator Crystal Input. A In XTAL3 P1.3 D I/O or Port 1.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In D I/O PC1 P1.2 Pulse Counter 0. D I/O PC0 A33 65 33 D I/O or Port 1.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In A Out XTAL4 SmaRTClock Oscillator Crystal Output. P1.4 A31 60 31 D I/O or Port 1.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In P1.5 A30 57 30 D I/O or Port 1.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. A In P1.6 A29 56 29 D I/O or Port 1.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. May also be used as A In INT0 or INT1. P1.7 A28 54 28 D I/O or Port 1.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. May also be used as A In INT0 or INT1. P2.0 A27 53 27 D I/O or Port 2.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. May also be used as A In SCK for SPI1. Rev. 1.0 37 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 Type Description P2.1 A26 49 26 D I/O or Port 2.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. May also be used as A In MISO for SPI1. P2.2 A25 48 25 D I/O or Port 2.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. May also be used as A In MOSI for SPI1. P2.3 A24 47 24 D I/O or Port 2.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. VIORF supply. May also be used as A In NSS for SPI1. P2.4 A23 46 23 D I/O or Port 2.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO COM0 LCD Common Pin 0 (Backplane Driver) P2.5 A22 45 22 D I/O or Port 2.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO COM1 LCD Common Pin 1 (Backplane Driver) P2.6 A21 43 21 D I/O or Port 2.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO COM2 LCD Common Pin 2 (Backplane Driver) P2.7 A20 41 20 D I/O or Port 2.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO COM2 LCD Common Pin 3 (Backplane Driver) P3.0 A19 39 19 D I/O or Port 3.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD0 LCD Segment Pin 0 P3.1 LCD1 A18 38 18 D I/O or Port 3.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD Segment Pin 1 38 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name P3.2 Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 A17 36 17 Type Description D I/O or Port 3.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD2 LCD Segment Pin 2 P3.3 A16 34 16 D I/O or Port 3.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD3 LCD Segment Pin 3 P3.4 A15 32 15 D I/O or Port 3.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD4 LCD Segment Pin 4 P3.5 A14 28 14 D I/O or Port 3.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD5 LCD Segment Pin 5 P3.6 A13 26 13 D I/O or Port 3.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD6 LCD Segment Pin 6 P3.7 A12 24 12 D I/O or Port 3.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD7 LCD Segment Pin 7 P4.0 A11 23 11 D I/O or Port 4.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD8 LCD Segment Pin 8 P4.1 LCD9 B3 7 D I/O or Port 4.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD Segment Pin 9 Rev. 1.0 39 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name P4.2 Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 B2 5 Type Description D I/O or Port 4.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD10 LCD Segment Pin 10 P4.3 B1 3 D I/O or Port 4.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD11 LCD Segment Pin 11 P4.4 D1 80 D I/O or Port 4.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD12 LCD Segment Pin 12 P4.5 B28 77 D I/O or Port 4.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD13 LCD Segment Pin 13 P4.6 B27 75 D I/O or Port 4.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD14 LCD Segment Pin 14 P4.7 B26 73 D I/O or Port 4.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD15 LCD Segment Pin 15 P5.0 B25 71 D I/O or Port 5.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD16 LCD Segment Pin 16 P5.1 LCD17 B24 69 D I/O or Port 5.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD Segment Pin 17 40 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name P5.2 Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 B23 63 Type Description D I/O or Port 5.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD18 LCD Segment Pin 18 P5.3 B22 62 D I/O or Port 5.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD19 LCD Segment Pin 19 P5.4 D4 59 D I/O or Port 5.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD20 LCD Segment Pin 20 P5.5 B21 55 D I/O or Port 5.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD21 LCD Segment Pin 21 P5.6 B15 44 D I/O or Port 5.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD22 LCD Segment Pin 22 P5.7 D3 42 D I/O or Port 5.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD23 LCD Segment Pin 23 P6.0 B14 40 D I/O or Port 6.0. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD24 LCD Segment Pin 24 P6.1 LCD25 B13 37 D I/O or Port 6.1. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD Segment Pin 25 Rev. 1.0 41 C8051F96x Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F96x (Continued) Name P6.2 Pin Numbers DQFN76 TQFP80 QFN40 B12 35 Type Description D I/O or Port 6.2. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD26 LCD Segment Pin 26 P6.3 B11 33 D I/O or Port 6.3. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD27 LCD Segment Pin 27 P6.4 B10 29 D I/O or Port 6.4. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD28 LCD Segment Pin 28 P6.5 B9 27 D I/O or Port 6.5. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD29 LCD Segment Pin 29 P6.6 B8 25 D I/O or Port 6.6. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD30 LCD Segment Pin 30 P6.7 LCD31 D2 18 D I/O or Port 6.7. See Port I/O Section for a complete description. A In AO LCD Segment Pin 31 42 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x P0.4/ TX P4.4/ LCD12 D1 A40 P0.3/ XTAL2 A1 D5 NC P0.2/ XTAL1 P0.1/ AGND P0.0/ VREF VBAT A2 B27 A36 B26 A35 B25 A34 B24 A33 B23 A32 B22 P4.5/ P4.6/ P4.7/ P5.0/ P5.1/ P5.2/ P5.3/ LCD13 LCD14 LCD15 LCD16 LCD17 LCD18 LCD19 B2 P4.2/ LCD10 B3 P4.1/ LCD9 P1.4 A31 D4 P5.4/ LCD20 D8 A30 P1.5 A29 P1.6 A28 P1.7 A27 P2.0 A26 P2.1 A25 P2.2 A24 P2.3 A23 P2.4/ COM0 A22 P2.5/ COM1 D7 A21 P2.6/ COM2 A20 D3 P5.7/ LCD23 NC P5.5/ B21 LCD21 NC B20 A4 NC B19 A5 C8051F960/2/4/6/8 - GM VIO NC B18 A6 NC B17 IND A7 NC B16 GND A8 B7 RST/ C2CK B28 A37 P1.1/ P1.2/ P1.3/ VLCD PC1 XTAL3 XTAL4 A3 B6 VDC A38 B1 B5 GNDDC A39 P4.3/ LCD11 B4 VBATDC P0.5/ P0.6/ P0.7/ P1.0/ RX CNVSTR IREF0 PC0 A9 NC P7.0/ C2D A10 D6 P6.7/ LCD31 D2 A11 P5.6/ B15 LCD22 VIORF P6.6/ P6.5/ P6.4/ P6.3/ P6.2/ P6.1/ P6.0/ LCD30 LCD29 LCD28 LCD27 LCD26 LCD25 LCD24 B8 A12 B9 A13 B10 A14 B11 A15 B12 A16 B13 A17 P4.0/ P3.7/ P3.6/ P3.5/ P3.4/ P3.3/ P3.2/ LCD8 LCD7 LCD6 LCD5 LCD4 LCD3 LCD2 B14 A18 A19 NC P3.1/ P3.0/ P2.7/ LCD1 LCD0 COM3 Figure 3.1. DQFN-76 Pinout Diagram (Top View) Rev. 1.0 43 C8051F96x P0.4/ TX 40 P0.5/ P0.6/ P0.7/ P1.0/ RX CNVSTR IREF0 PC0 39 38 37 36 P1.1/ P1.2/ P1.3/ VLCD PC1 XTAL3 XTAL4 35 34 33 32 31 P0.3/ XTAL2 1 30 P1.5 P0.2/ XTAL1 2 29 P1.6 P0.1/ AGND 3 28 P1.7 P0.0/ VREF 4 27 P2.0 VBAT/ VBATDC /VIO 5 26 P2.1 IND 6 25 P2.2 GND/ GNDDC 7 24 P2.3 VDC/ VIORF 8 23 P2.4/ COM0 RST/ C2CK 9 22 P2.5/ COM1 P7.0/ C2D 10 21 P2.6/ COM2 C8051F961/3/5/7/9 - GM 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P4.0/ P3.7/ P3.6/ P3.5/ P3.4/ P3.3/ P3.2/ LCD8 LCD7 LCD6 LCD5 LCD4 LCD3 LCD2 18 19 Rev. 1.0 20 P3.1/ P3.0/ P2.7/ LCD1 LCD0 COM3 Figure 3.2. QFN-40 Pinout Diagram (Top View) 44 P1.4 P4.4/LCD12 P0.4/TX P0.5/RX P4.5/LCD13 P0.6/CNVSTR P4.6/LCD14 P0.7/IREF P4.7/LCD15 P1.0/PC0 P5.0/LCD16 P1.1/PC1 P5.1/LCD17 GND P1.2/XTAL3 GND P1.3/XTAL4 GND P5.2/LCD18 P5.3/LCD19 VLCD 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 C8051F96x P0.3/XTAL2 1 60 P1.4 P0.2/XTAL1 2 59 P5.4/LCD20 P4.3/LCD11 3 58 NC P0.1/AGND 4 57 P1.5 P4.2/LCD10 5 56 P1.6 P0.0/VREF 6 55 P5.5/LCD21 P4.1/LCD9 7 54 P1.7 VBAT 8 53 P2.0/SCK1 VIO 9 52 NC VBATDC 10 51 NC IND 11 50 NC GNDDC 12 49 P2.1/MISO1 GND 13 48 P2.2/MOSI1 VDC 14 47 P2.3/NSS1 C8051F960/2/4/6/8 GQ 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 P3.4/LCD4 P6.3/LCD27 P3.3/LCD3 P6.2/LCD26 P3.2/LCD2 P6.1/LCD25 P3.1/LCD1 P3.0/LCD0 P6.0/LCD24 30 NC 29 NC NC P6.4/LCD28 P2.7/COM3 28 41 27 20 P3.5/LCD5 P5.7/LCD23 NC P6.5/LCD29 P2.6/COM2 42 26 43 19 P3.6/LCD6 18 NC 25 P6.7/LCD31 24 P5.6/LCD22 P3.7/LCD7 44 P6.6/LCD30 17 23 P2.5/COM1 P7.0/C2D 22 P2.4/COM0 45 NC 46 16 P4.0/LCD8 15 21 VIORF RST/C2CK Figure 3.3. TQFP-80 Pinout Diagram (Top View) Rev. 1.0 45 C8051F96x 46 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 3.1. DQFN-76 Package Specifications 3.1.1. Package Drawing Figure 3.4. DQFN-76 Package Drawing Table 3.2. DQFN-76 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Typ Max Dimension Min Typ Max A 0.74 0.84 0.94 E2 3.00 3.10 3.20 b 0.25 0.30 0.35 aaa — — 0.10 bbb — — 0.10 ddd — — 0.08 eee — — 0.10 D D2 6.00 BSC 3.00 3.10 e 0.50 BSC E 6.00 BSC 3.20 Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 46 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 3.1.2. Land Pattern Figure 3.5. DQFN-76 Land Pattern Table 3.3. DQFN-76 Land Pattern Dimensions Dimension (mm) Symbol Typ Max C1 5.50 — C2 5.50 — e 0.50 — f — 0.35 P1 — 3.20 P2 — 3.20 Notes: 1. All feature sizes shown are at Maximum Material Condition (MMC) and a card fabrication tolerance of 0.05 mm is assumed. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing is per the ANSI Y14.5M-1994 specification. 3. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines. Rev. 1.0 47 C8051F96x 3.1.3. Soldering Guidelines 3.1.3.1. Solder Mask Design All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 μm minimum, all the way around the pad. 3.1.3.2. Stencil Design 1. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 2. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 3. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pads. 4. A 2x2 array of 1.25 mm square openings on 1.60 mm pitch should be used for the center ground pad. 3.1.3.3. Card Assembly 1. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 2. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 3.1.3.4. Inner via placement 1. Inner via placement per Figure 3.6. 2. Reccomended via hole size is 0.150 mm (6 mil) laser drilled holes. 48 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x C1 v h C2 e Detail A 28X Detail A Figure 3.6. Recomended Inner Via Placement Table 3.4. Recomended Inner Via Placement Dimensions Dimension Min Nominal Max C1 — 3.8 — C2 — 3.8 — v — 0.35 — h — 0.150 — Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Via hole should be 0.150 mm (6 mil) laser drilled. Rev. 1.0 49 C8051F96x 3.2. QFN-40 Package Specifications Figure 3.7. Typical QFN-40 Package Drawing Table 3.5. QFN-40 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Typ Max Dimension Min Typ Max A A1 b D D2 e E 0.80 0.00 0.18 0.85 — 0.23 6.00 BSC 4.10 0.50 BSC 6.00 BSC 0.90 0.05 0.28 E2 L L1 aaa bbb ddd eee 4.00 0.35 — — — — — 4.10 0.40 — — — — — 4.20 0.45 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.05 0.08 4.00 4.20 Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This drawing conforms to JEDEC Solid State Outline MO-220, variation VJJD-5, except for features A, D2, and E2 which are toleranced per supplier designation. 4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. Rev. 1.0 50 C8051F96x Figure 3.8. QFN-40 Landing Diagram Table 3.6. QFN-40 Landing Diagram Dimensions Dimension Min Max Dimension Min Max C1 5.80 5.90 X2 4.10 4.20 C2 5.80 5.90 Y1 0.75 0.85 Y2 4.10 4.20 e X1 0.50 BSC 0.15 0.25 Notes: General 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimension and Tolerancing is per the ANSI Y14.5M-1994 specification. 3. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-SM-7351 guidelines. 4. All dimensions shown are at Maximum Material Condition (MMC). Least Material Condition (LMC) is calculated based on a Fabrication Allowance of 0.05 mm. Solder Mask Design 5. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 μm minimum, all the way around the pad. Stencil Design 6. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 7. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 8. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pads. 9. A 4x4 array of 0.80 mm square openings on a 1.05 mm pitch should be used for the center ground pad. Card Assembly 10. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 11. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 51 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 3.3. TQFP-80 Package Specifications Figure 3.9. TQFP-80 Package Drawing Table 3.7. TQFP-80 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Nominal Max A — — 1.20 A1 0.05 — 0.15 A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 b 0.17 0.20 0.27 c 0.09 — 0.20 D 14.00 BSC D1 12.00 BSC e 0.50 BSC E 14.00 BSC E1 12.00 BSC L L1 0.45 0.60 0.75 1.00 Ref Rev. 1.0 52 C8051F96x Table 3.7. TQFP-80 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Nominal Max Θ 0° 3.5° 7° aaa 0.20 bbb 0.20 ccc 0.08 ddd 0.08 eee 0.05 Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This package outline conforms to JEDEC MS-026, variant ADD. 4. Recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 53 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Figure 3.10. TQFP80 Landing Diagram Table 3.8. TQFP80 Landing Diagram Dimensions Dimension Min Max C1 13.30 13.40 C2 13.30 13.40 E 0.50 BSC X 0.20 0.30 Y 1.40 1.50 Notes: 1. All feature sizes shown are in mm unless otherwise noted. 2. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines. Rev. 1.0 54 C8051F96x 3.3.1. Soldering Guidelines 3.3.1.1. Solder Mask Design All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 μm minimum, all the way around the pad. 3.3.1.2. Stencil Design 1. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 2. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 3. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pads. 4. A 2x2 array of 1.25 mm square openings on 1.60 mm pitch should be used for the center ground pad. 3.3.1.3. Card Assembly 1. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 2. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 55 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 4. Electrical Characteristics Throughout the Electrical Characteristics chapter:  “VIO” refers to the VIO or VIORF Supply Voltage. 4.1. Absolute Maximum Specifications Table 4.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit Ambient Temperature under Bias –55 — 125 °C Storage Temperature –65 — 150 °C Voltage on any VIO Port I/O Pin (all Port I/O pins except P1.5/6/7 and P2.0/1/2/3) or RST with respect to GND –0.3 — VIO + 2 V Voltage on P1.5/6/7 or P2.0/1/2/3 with respect to GND. –0.3 — VIORF + 2 V Voltage on VBAT, VBATDC, VIO, or VIORF with respect to GND –0.3 — 4.0 V Maximum Total Current through VBAT or GND — — 500 mA Maximum Current through RST or any Port Pin — — 100 mA Maximum Total Current through all Port Pins — — 200 mA Note: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Rev. 1.0 56 C8051F96x 4.2. Electrical Characteristics Table 4.2. Global Electrical Characteristics –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Supply Voltage (VBAT) Min Typ 1.8 Max Unit 3.8 V — — 1.4 0.3 — 0.5 V SYSCLK (System Clock)2 0 — 25 MHz TSYSH (SYSCLK High Time) 18 — — ns TSYSL (SYSCLK Low Time) 18 — — ns Specified Operating Temperature Range –40 — +85 °C Max Unit Minimum RAM Data Retention Voltage1 Not in sleep mode in sleep mode Notes: 1. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 2. SYSCLK must be at least 32 kHz to enable debugging. Table 4.3. Digital Supply Current at VBAT pin with DC-DC Converter Enabled –40 to +85 °C, VBAT = 3.6V, VDC = 1.9 V, 24.5 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Digital Supply Current—CPU Active (Normal Mode, fetching instructions from flash, no external load) IBAT 1,2,3 VBAT= 3.0 V — 4.1 — mA VBAT= 3.3 V — 4.0 — mA VBAT= 3.6 V — 3.8 — mA Digital Supply Current—CPU Inactive (Sleep Mode, sourcing current to external device) IBAT1 sourcing 9 mA to external device — 6.5 — mA sourcing 19 mA to external device — 13 — mA Notes: 1. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 2. Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 3. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 57 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Supply Current—Active Mode, No Clock Gating (PCLKACT=0x0F) (CPU Active, fetching instructions from flash) IBAT 1, 2 IBAT Frequency Sensitivity 1,3,4 VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 24.5 MHz (includes precision oscillator current) — 4.9 5.5 mA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 20 MHz (includes low power oscillator current) — 3.9 — mA VBAT = 1.8 V, F = 1 MHz VBAT = 3.8 V, F = 1 MHz (includes external oscillator/GPIO current) — — 175 190 — — µA µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 32.768 kHz (includes SmaRTClock oscillator current) — 85 — µA — 183 — µA/MHz VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, T = 25 °C Digital Supply Current—Active Mode, All Peripheral Clocks Disabled (PCLKACT=0x00) (CPU Active, fetching instructions from flash) IBAT 1, 2 IBAT Frequency Sensitivity 1, 3 VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 24.5 MHz (includes precision oscillator current) — 3.9 — mA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 20 MHz (includes low power oscillator current) — 3.1 — mA VBAT = 1.8 V, F = 1 MHz VBAT = 3.8 V, F = 1 MHz (includes external oscillator/GPIO current) — — 165 180 — — µA µA — 140 — µA/MHz VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, T = 25 °C Notes: 1. Active Current measure using typical code loop - Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. Digital Supply Current depends on the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 2. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 3. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 4. Measured with one-shot enabled. 5. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x0F. 6. Using SmaRTClock osillator with external 32.768 kHz CMOS clock. Does not include crystal bias current. 7. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x00. Rev. 1.0 58 C8051F96x Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled (Continued) –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 24.5 MHz (includes precision oscillator current) — 3.5 — mA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 20 MHz (includes low power oscillator current) — 2.6 — mA VBAT = 1.8 V, F = 1 MHz VBAT = 3.8 V, F = 1 MHz (includes external oscillator/GPIO current) — — 340 360 — — µA µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 32.768 kHz (includes SmaRTClock oscillator current) — 2305 — µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, T = 25 °C — 135 — µA/MHz Digital Supply Current—Idle Mode (CPU Inactive, not Fetching Instructions from Flash) IBAT2 IBAT Frequency Sensitivity3 Notes: 1. Active Current measure using typical code loop - Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. Digital Supply Current depends on the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 2. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 3. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 4. Measured with one-shot enabled. 5. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x0F. 6. Using SmaRTClock osillator with external 32.768 kHz CMOS clock. Does not include crystal bias current. 7. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x00. 59 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled (Continued) –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Supply Current— Low Power Idle Mode, All peripheral clocks enabled (PCLKEN = 0x0F) (CPU Inactive, not fetching instructions from flash) IBAT2, 6 IBAT Frequency Sensitivity3 VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 24.5 MHz (includes precision oscillator current) — 1.5 1.9 mA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 20 MHz (includes low power oscillator current) — 1.07 — mA VBAT = 1.8 V, F = 1 MHz VBAT = 3.8 V, F = 1 MHz (includes external oscillator/GPIO current) — — 270 280 — — µA µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 32.768 kHz (includes SmaRTClock oscillator current) — 2325 — µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, T = 25 °C — 475 — µA/MHz Digital Supply Current— Low Power Idle Mode, All Peripheral Clocks Disabled (PCLKEN = 0x00) (CPU Inactive, not fetching instructions from flash) IBAT2, 7 IBAT Frequency Sensitivity3 VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 24.5 MHz (includes precision oscillator current) — 487 — µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, F = 20 MHz (includes low power oscillator current) — 340 — µA VBAT = 1.8 V, F = 1 MHz VBAT = 3.8 V, F = 1 MHz (includes external oscillator/GPIO current) — — 90 94 — — µA µA VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V, T = 25 °C — 115 — µA/MHz — — 77 84 — — µA Digital Supply Current—Suspend Mode Digital Supply Current (Suspend Mode) VBAT = 1.8 V VBAT = 3.8 V Notes: 1. Active Current measure using typical code loop - Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. Digital Supply Current depends on the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 2. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 3. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 4. Measured with one-shot enabled. 5. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x0F. 6. Using SmaRTClock osillator with external 32.768 kHz CMOS clock. Does not include crystal bias current. 7. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x00. Rev. 1.0 60 C8051F96x Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled (Continued) –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD 3.0 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD 3.6 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD — — — 0.4 0.6 0.8 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD 3.0 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD 3.6 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD — — — 0.7 1.0 1.2 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD 3.0 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD 3.6 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD — — — 0.7 1.1 1.2 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD 3.0 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD 3.6 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD — — — 0.8 1.1 1.4 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD 3.0 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD 3.6 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD — — — 1.1 1.5 1.8 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD 3.0 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD 3.6 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD — — — 1.2 1.6 1.9 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 3-Mux LCD 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD — — — — 1.2 1.6 1.8 2.0 — — — — µA Digital Supply Current—Sleep Mode (LCD Enabled, RTC enabled) Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, SmaRTClock running, internal LFO, LCD Contrast Mode 1, charge pump disabled, 60 Hz refresh rate, driving 32 segment pins w/ no load) Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, SmaRTClock running, 32.768 kHz Crystal, LCD Contrast Mode 1, charge pump disabled, 60 Hz refresh rate, driving 32 segment pins w/ no load) Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, SmaRTClock running, internal LFO, LCD Contrast Mode 3 (2.7 V), charge pump enabled, 60 Hz refresh rate, driving 32 segment pins w/ no load) Notes: 1. Active Current measure using typical code loop - Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. Digital Supply Current depends on the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 2. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 3. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 4. Measured with one-shot enabled. 5. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x0F. 6. Using SmaRTClock osillator with external 32.768 kHz CMOS clock. Does not include crystal bias current. 7. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x00. 61 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled (Continued) –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, SmaRTClock running, 32.768 kHz Crystal, LCD Contrast Mode 3 (2.7 V), charge pump enabled, 60 Hz refresh rate, driving 32 segment pins w/ no load) 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, static LCD 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 2-Mux LCD 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 3-Mux LCD 1.8 V, T = 25 °C, 4-Mux LCD — — — — 1.3 1.8 1.8 2.0 — — — — µA Notes: 1. Active Current measure using typical code loop - Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. Digital Supply Current depends on the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 2. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 3. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 4. Measured with one-shot enabled. 5. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x0F. 6. Using SmaRTClock osillator with external 32.768 kHz CMOS clock. Does not include crystal bias current. 7. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x00. Rev. 1.0 62 C8051F96x Table 4.4. Digital Supply Current with DC-DC Converter Disabled (Continued) –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Supply Current—Sleep Mode (LCD disabled, RTC enabled) Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, SmaRTClock running, 32.768 kHz crystal) 1.8 V, T = 25 °C 3.0 V, T = 25 °C 3.6 V, T = 25 °C 1.8 V, T = 85 °C 3.0 V, T = 85 °C 3.6 V, T = 85 °C (includes SmaRTClock oscillator and VBAT Supply Monitor) — — — — — — 0.35 0.55 0.60 1.56 2.38 2.79 — — — — — — µA Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, SmaRTClock running, internal LFO) 1.8 V, T = 25 °C 3.0 V, T = 25 °C 3.6 V, T = 25 °C 1.8 V, T = 85 °C 3.0 V, T = 85 °C 3.6 V, T = 85 °C (includes SmaRTClock oscillator and VBAT Supply Monitor) — — — — — — 0.20 0.35 0.45 1.30 2.06 2.41 — — — — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C 3.0 V, T = 25 °C 3.6 V, T = 25 °C 1.8 V, T = 85 °C 3.0 V, T = 85 °C 3.6 V, T = 85 °C (includes POR supply monitor) — — — — — — 0.05 0.08 0.12 1.2 2.2 2.4 — — 0.23 — — — µA 1.8 V, T = 25 °C 3.0 V, T = 25 °C 3.6 V, T = 25 °C 1.8 V, T = 85 °C 3.0 V, T = 85 °C 3.6 V, T = 85 °C — — — — — — 0.01 0.02 0.06 1.1 2.1 2.3 — — — — — — µA Digital Supply Current—Sleep Mode (LCD disabled, RTC disabled) Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode) Digital Supply Current (Sleep Mode, POR Supply Monitor Disabled) Notes: 1. Active Current measure using typical code loop - Digital Supply Current depends upon the particular code being executed. Digital Supply Current depends on the particular code being executed. The values in this table are obtained with the CPU executing a mix of instructions in two loops: djnz R1, $, followed by a loop that accesses an SFR, and moves data around using the CPU (between accumulator and b-register). The supply current will vary slightly based on the physical location of this code in flash. As described in the Flash Memory chapter, it is best to align the jump addresses with a flash word address (byte location /4), to minimize flash accesses and power consumption. 2. Includes oscillator and regulator supply current. 3. Based on device characterization data; Not production tested. 4. Measured with one-shot enabled. 5. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x0F. 6. Using SmaRTClock osillator with external 32.768 kHz CMOS clock. Does not include crystal bias current. 7. Low-Power Idle mode current measured with CLKMODE = 0x04, PCON = 0x01, and PCLKEN = 0x00. 63 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 7 6 Active IDD (mA) 5 4 Idle 3 2 LP Idle (PCLKEN=0x0F) 1 LP Idle (PCLKEN=0x00) 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Frequency (MHz) Figure 4.1. Frequency Sensitivity (External CMOS Clock, 25°C) Rev. 1.0 64 C8051F96x Table 4.5. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics VIO = 1.8 to 3.8 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. Parameters Conditions Min Typ Max IOH = –3 mA, Port I/O push-pull VIO– 0.7 — — IOH = –10 µA, Port I/O push-pull VIO – 0.1 — — Units Output High Voltage High Drive Strength, PnDRV.n = 1 IOH = –10 mA, Port I/O push-pull See Chart V Low Drive Strength, PnDRV.n = 0 VIO – 0.7 — — VIO – 0.1 — — — See Chart — IOL = 8.5 mA — — 0.6 IOL = 10 µA — — 0.1 IOL = 25 mA — See Chart — IOH = –1 mA, Port I/O push-pull IOH = –10 µA, Port I/O push-pull IOH = –3 mA, Port I/O push-pull Output Low Voltage High Drive Strength, PnDRV.n = 1 V Low Drive Strength, PnDRV.n = 0 Input High Voltage Input Low Voltage IOL = 1.4 mA — — 0.6 IOL = 10 µA — — 0.1 IOL = 4 mA — See Chart — VBAT = 2.0 to 3.8 V VIO – 0.6 — — V VBAT = 1.8 to 2.0 V 0.7 x VIO — — V VBAT = 2.0 to 3.8 V — — 0.6 V VBAT = 1.8 to 2.0 V — — 0.3 x VIO V Weak Pullup On, VIN = 0 V, VBAT = 1.8 V — — ±1 — 4 — Weak Pullup On, Vin = 0 V, VBAT = 3.8 V — 20 35 Weak Pullup Off Input Leakage Current 65 Rev. 1.0 µA C8051F96x Typical VOH (High Drive Mode) 3.6 VDD = 3.6V Voltage 3.3 3 VDD = 3.0V 2.7 VDD = 2.4V 2.4 VDD = 1.8V 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.2 0.9 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Load Current (mA) Typical VOH (Low Drive Mode) Voltage 3.6 3.3 VDD = 3.6V 3 VDD = 3.0V 2.7 VDD = 2.4V 2.4 VDD = 1.8V 2.1 1.8 1.5 1.2 0.9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Load Current (mA) Figure 4.2. Typical VOH Curves, 1.8–3.6 V Rev. 1.0 66 C8051F96x Typical VOL (High Drive Mode) 1.8 VDD = 3.6V 1.5 VDD = 3.0V Voltage 1.2 VDD = 2.4V VDD = 1.8V 0.9 0.6 0.3 0 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 Load Current (mA) Typical VOL (Low Drive Mode) 1.8 VDD = 3.6V 1.5 VDD = 3.0V Voltage 1.2 VDD = 2.4V VDD = 1.8V 0.9 0.6 0.3 0 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 Load Current (mA) Figure 4.3. Typical VOL Curves, 1.8–3.6 V 67 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 4.6. Reset Electrical Characteristics VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Units IOL = 1.4 mA, — — 0.6 V VBAT = 2.0 to 3.8 V VBAT – 0.6 — — V VBAT = 1.8 to 2.0 V 0.7 x VBAT — — V VBAT = 2.0 to 3.8 V — — 0.6 V VBAT = 1.8 to 2.0 V — — 0.3 x VBAT V RST Input Pullup Current RST = 0.0 V, VBAT = 1.8 V RST = 0.0 V, VBAT = 3.8 V — 4 — — 20 35 VBAT Monitor Threshold (VRST)* Early Warning Reset Trigger (all power modes except Sleep) 1.8 1.85 1.9 1.7 1.75 1.8 VBAT Ramp from 0–1.8 V — — 3 RST Output Low Voltage RST Input High Voltage RST Input Low Voltage VBAT Ramp Time for Power On* µA V ms POR Monitor Threshold (VPOR) Brownout Condition (VBAT Falling) 0.45 0.7 1.0 Recovery from Brownout (VBAT Rising) — 1.75 — Missing Clock Detector Timeout Time from last system clock rising edge to reset initiation 100 650 1000 µs Minimum System Clock w/ Missing Clock Detector Enabled System clock frequency which triggers a missing clock detector timeout — 7 10 kHz Delay between release of any reset source and code execution at location 0x0000 — 10 — µs Minimum RST Low Time to Generate a System Reset 15 — — µs Digital/Analog Monitor Turn-on Time — 300 — ns Digital Monitor Supply Current — 14 — µA Analog Monitor Supply Current — 14 — µA Reset Time Delay V *Note: The VBAT monitor electical specifications apply to both the analog and digital VBAT monitors (“SFR Definition 22.1. VDM0CN: VDD Supply Monitor Control” on page 282). Rev. 1.0 68 C8051F96x Table 4.7. Power Management Electrical Specifications VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Units 2 — 3 SYSCLKs — 400 — ns — 2 — µs Idle Mode Wake-up Time Suspend Mode Wake-up Time CLKDIV = 0x00 Low Power or Precision Osc. Sleep Mode Wake-up Time Table 4.8. Flash Electrical Characteristics VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified., Parameter Flash Size Conditions C8051F960/1/2/3 C8051F964/5 C8051F966/7 C8051F968/9 Endurance Erase Cycle Time Write Cycle Time Min 131072 65536 32768 16384 Typ — — — — Max — — — — 20 k 100k — 28 57 32 64 36 71 Units bytes bytes bytes bytes Erase/Write Cycles ms µs Table 4.9. Internal Precision Oscillator Electrical Characteristics VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V; TA = –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified; Using factory-calibrated settings. Parameter Oscillator Frequency Oscillator Supply Current (from VBAT) Conditions –40 to +85 °C, VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V 25 °C; includes bias current of 50 µA typical Min Typ Max Units 24 24.5 25 MHz — 300* — µA *Note: Does not include clock divider or clock tree supply current. Table 4.10. Internal Low-Power Oscillator Electrical Characteristics VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V; TA = –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified; Using factory-calibrated settings. Parameter Oscillator Frequency Oscillator Supply Current (from VBAT) Conditions –40 to +85 °C, VBAT = 1.8–3.8 V 25 °C No separate bias current required *Note: Does not include clock divider or clock tree supply current. 69 Rev. 1.0 Min Typ Max Units 18 20 22 MHz — 100* — µA C8051F96x Table 4.11. SmaRTClock Characteristics VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V; TA = –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified; Using factory-calibrated settings. Parameter Oscillator Frequency (LFO) Conditions Min 13.1 Typ 16.4 Max 19.7 Units kHz Table 4.12. ADC0 Electrical Characteristics VBAT = 1.8 to 3.8 V, VREF = 1.65 V (REFSL[1:0] = 11), –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Units 12-bit mode 10-bit mode 12-bit mode1 10-bit mode — — 12 10 ±1 ±0.5 ±3 ±1 LSB 12-bit mode1 10-bit mode — — ±0.8 ±0.5 ±2 ±1 LSB 12-bit mode 10-bit mode 12-bit mode2 10-bit mode — — — — ± 1. Rev. 1.0 286 C8051F96x 23.1. Programmable Precision Internal Oscillator All C8051F96x devices include a programmable precision internal oscillator that may be selected as the system clock. OSCICL is factory calibrated to obtain a 24.5 MHz frequency. See Section “4. Electrical Characteristics” on page 56 for complete oscillator specifications. The precision oscillator supports a spread spectrum mode which modulates the output frequency in order to reduce the EMI generated by the system. When enabled (SSE = 1), the oscillator output frequency is modulated by a stepped triangle wave whose frequency is equal to the oscillator frequency divided by 384 (63.8 kHz using the factory calibration). The deviation from the nominal oscillator frequency is +0%, –1.6%, and the step size is typically 0.26% of the nominal frequency. When using this mode, the typical average oscillator frequency is lowered from 24.5 MHz to 24.3 MHz. 23.2. Low Power Internal Oscillator All C8051F96x devices include a low power internal oscillator that defaults as the system clock after a system reset. The low power internal oscillator frequency is 20 MHz ± 10% and is automatically enabled when selected as the system clock and disabled when not in use. See Section “4. Electrical Characteristics” on page 56 for complete oscillator specifications. 23.3. External Oscillator Drive Circuit All C8051F96x devices include an external oscillator circuit that may drive an external crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, or RC network. A CMOS clock may also provide a clock input. Figure 23.1 shows a block diagram of the four external oscillator options. The external oscillator is enabled and configured using the OSCXCN register. The external oscillator output may be selected as the system clock or used to clock some of the digital peripherals (e.g., Timers, PCA, etc.). See the data sheet chapters for each digital peripheral for details. See Section “4. Electrical Characteristics” on page 56 for complete oscillator specifications. 23.3.1. External Crystal Mode If a crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the external oscillator, the crystal/resonator and a 10 MΩ resistor must be wired across the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins as shown in Figure 23.1, Option 1. Appropriate loading capacitors should be added to XTAL1 and XTAL2, and both pins should be configured for analog I/O with the digital output drivers disabled. Figure 23.2 shows the external oscillator circuit for a 20 MHz quartz crystal with a manufacturer recommended load capacitance of 12.5 pF. Loading capacitors are "in series" as seen by the crystal and "in parallel" with the stray capacitance of the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins. The total value of the each loading capacitor and the stray capacitance of each XTAL pin should equal 12.5 pF x 2 = 25 pF. With a stray capacitance of 10 pF per pin, the 15 pF capacitors yield an equivalent series capacitance of 12.5 pF across the crystal. Note: The recommended load capacitance depends upon the crystal and the manufacturer. Please refer to the crystal data sheet when completing these calculations. 287 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 15 pF XTAL1 10 Mohm 25 MHz XTAL2 15 pF Figure 23.2. 25 MHz External Crystal Example Important Note on External Crystals: Crystal oscillator circuits are quite sensitive to PCB layout. The crystal should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL pins on the device. The traces should be as short as possible and shielded with ground plane from any other traces which could introduce noise or interference. When using an external crystal, the external oscillator drive circuit must be configured by software for Crystal Oscillator Mode or Crystal Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage. The divide by 2 stage ensures that the clock derived from the external oscillator has a duty cycle of 50%. The External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) must also be specified based on the crystal frequency. The selection should be based on Table 23.1. For example, a 25 MHz crystal requires an XFCN setting of 111b. Table 23.1. Recommended XFCN Settings for Crystal Mode XFCN Crystal Frequency Bias Current Typical Supply Current (VDD = 2.4 V) 000 f ≤ 20 kHz 0.5 µA 3.0 µA, f = 32.768 kHz 001 20 kHz < f ≤ 58 kHz 1.5 µA 4.8 µA, f = 32.768 kHz 010 58 kHz < f ≤ 155 kHz 4.8 µA 9.6 µA, f = 32.768 kHz 011 155 kHz < f ≤ 415 kHz 14 µA 28 µA, f = 400 kHz 100 415 kHz < f ≤ 1.1 MHz 40 µA 71 µA, f = 400 kHz 101 1.1 MHz < f ≤ 3.1 MHz 120 µA 193 µA, f = 400 kHz 110 3.1 MHz < f ≤ 8.2 MHz 550 µA 940 µA, f = 8 MHz 111 8.2 MHz < f ≤ 25 MHz 2.6 mA 3.9 mA, f = 25 MHz When the crystal oscillator is first enabled, the external oscillator valid detector allows software to determine when the external system clock has stabilized. Switching to the external oscillator before the crystal oscillator has stabilized can result in unpredictable behavior. The recommended procedure for starting the crystal is as follows: 1. Configure XTAL1 and XTAL2 for analog I/O and disable the digital output drivers. 2. Configure and enable the external oscillator. 3. Poll for XTLVLD => 1. 4. Switch the system clock to the external oscillator. Rev. 1.0 288 C8051F96x 23.3.2. External RC Mode If an RC network is used as the external oscillator, the circuit should be configured as shown in Figure 23.1, Option 2. The RC network should be added to XTAL2, and XTAL2 should be configured for analog I/O with the digital output drivers disabled. XTAL1 is not affected in RC mode. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however for very small capacitors, the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. The resistor should be no smaller than 10 kΩ. The oscillation frequency can be determined by the following equation: 3 1.23 × 10 f = ------------------------R×C where f = frequency of clock in MHzR = pull-up resistor value in kΩ VDD = power supply voltage in VoltsC = capacitor value on the XTAL2 pin in pF To determine the required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, first select the RC network value to produce the desired frequency of oscillation. For example, if the frequency desired is 100 kHz, let R = 246 kΩ and C = 50 pF: 3 3 1.23 × 10 1.23 × 10 f = ------------------------- = ------------------------- = 100 kHz R×C 246 × 50 where f = frequency of clock in MHz VDD = power supply voltage in Volts R = pull-up resistor value in kΩ C = capacitor value on the XTAL2 pin in pF Referencing Table 23.2, the recommended XFCN setting is 010. Table 23.2. Recommended XFCN Settings for RC and C modes XFCN Approximate Frequency Range (RC and C Mode) K Factor (C Mode) Typical Supply Current/ Actual Measured Frequency (C Mode, VDD = 2.4 V) 000 f ≤ 25 kHz K Factor = 0.87 3.0 µA, f = 11 kHz, C = 33 pF 001 25 kHz < f ≤ 50 kHz K Factor = 2.6 5.5 µA, f = 33 kHz, C = 33 pF 010 50 kHz < f ≤ 100 kHz K Factor = 7.7 13 µA, f = 98 kHz, C = 33 pF 011 100 kHz < f ≤ 200 kHz K Factor = 22 32 µA, f = 270 kHz, C = 33 pF 100 200 kHz < f ≤ 400 kHz K Factor = 65 82 µA, f = 310 kHz, C = 46 pF 101 400 kHz < f ≤ 800 kHz K Factor = 180 242 µA, f = 890 kHz, C = 46 pF 110 800 kHz < f ≤ 1.6 MHz K Factor = 664 1.0 mA, f = 2.0 MHz, C = 46 pF 111 1.6 MHz < f ≤ 3.2 MHz K Factor = 1590 4.6 mA, f = 6.8 MHz, C = 46 pF When the RC oscillator is first enabled, the external oscillator valid detector allows software to determine when oscillation has stabilized. The recommended procedure for starting the RC oscillator is as follows: 1. Configure XTAL2 for analog I/O and disable the digital output drivers. 2. Configure and enable the external oscillator. 3. Poll for XTLVLD > 1. 4. Switch the system clock to the external oscillator. 289 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 23.3.3. External Capacitor Mode If a capacitor is used as the external oscillator, the circuit should be configured as shown in Figure 23.1, Option 3. The capacitor should be added to XTAL2, and XTAL2 should be configured for analog I/O with the digital output drivers disabled. XTAL1 is not affected in RC mode. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however, for very small capacitors, the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. The oscillation frequency and the required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register can be determined by the following equation: KF f = --------------------C × V DD where f = frequency of clock in MHzR = pull-up resistor value in kΩ VDD = power supply voltage in VoltsC = capacitor value on the XTAL2 pin in pF Below is an example of selecting the capacitor and finding the frequency of oscillation Assume VDD = 3.0 V and f = 150 kHz: KF f = --------------------C × V DD KF 0.150 MHz = ----------------C × 3.0 Since a frequency of roughly 150 kHz is desired, select the K Factor from Table 23.2 as KF = 22: 22 0.150 MHz = ----------------------C × 3.0 V 22 C = ----------------------------------------------0.150 MHz × 3.0 V C = 48.8 pF Therefore, the XFCN value to use in this example is 011 and C is approximately 50 pF. The recommended startup procedure for C mode is the same as RC mode. 23.3.4. External CMOS Clock Mode If an external CMOS clock is used as the external oscillator, the clock should be directly routed into XTAL2. The XTAL2 pin should be configured as a digital input. XTAL1 is not used in external CMOS clock mode. The external oscillator valid detector will always return zero when the external oscillator is configured to External CMOS Clock mode. Rev. 1.0 290 C8051F96x 23.4. Special Function Registers for Selecting and Configuring the System Clock The clocking sources on C8051F96x devices are enabled and configured using the OSCICN, OSCICL, OSCXCN and the SmaRTClock internal registers. See Section “24. SmaRTClock (Real Time Clock)” on page 295 for SmaRTClock register descriptions. The system clock source for the MCU can be selected using the CLKSEL register. To minimize active mode current, the oneshot timer which sets Flash read time should by bypassed when the system clock is greater than 10 MHz. See the FLSCL register description for details. The clock selected as the system clock can be divided by 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, or 128. When switching between two clock divide values, the transition may take up to 128 cycles of the undivided clock source. The CLKRDY flag can be polled to determine when the new clock divide value has been applied. The clock divider must be set to "divide by 1" when entering Suspend or Sleep Mode. The system clock source may also be switched on-the-fly. The switchover takes effect after one clock period of the slower oscillator. SFR Definition 23.1. CLKSEL: Clock Select Bit 7 6 Name CLKRDY CLKDIV[2:0] Type R R/W Reset 0 0 5 0 4 3 2 1 0 CLKSEL[2:0] R/W 1 0 R/W 0 1 0 SFR Page = All Pages; SFR Address = 0xA9 Bit Name 7 CLKRDY 6:4 3 2:0 291 CLKDIV[2:0] Unused CLKSEL[2:0] Function System Clock Divider Clock Ready Flag. 0: The selected clock divide setting has not been applied to the system clock. 1: The selected clock divide setting has been applied to the system clock. System Clock Divider Bits. Selects the clock division to be applied to the undivided system clock source. 000: System clock is divided by 1. 001: System clock is divided by 2. 010: System clock is divided by 4. 011: System clock is divided by 8. 100: System clock is divided by 16. 101: System clock is divided by 32. 110: System clock is divided by 64. 111: System clock is divided by 128. Read = 0b. Must Write 0b. System Clock Select. Selects the oscillator to be used as the undivided system clock source. 000: Precision Internal Oscillator. 001: External Oscillator. 010: Low Power Oscillator divided by 8. 011: SmaRTClock Oscillator. 100: Low Power Oscillator. All other values reserved. Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 23.2. OSCICN: Internal Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IOSCEN IFRDY Type R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xB2 Bit Name 7 IOSCEN Function Internal Oscillator Enable. 0: Internal oscillator disabled. 1: Internal oscillator enabled. 6 IFRDY Internal Oscillator Frequency Ready Flag. 0: Internal oscillator is not running at its programmed frequency. 1: Internal oscillator is running at its programmed frequency. 5:0 Reserved Must perform read-modify-write. Notes: 1. Read-modify-write operations such as ORL and ANL must be used to set or clear the enable bit of this register. 2. OSCBIAS (REG0CN.4) must be set to 1 before enabling the precision internal oscillator. Rev. 1.0 292 C8051F96x SFR Definition 23.3. OSCICL: Internal Oscillator Calibration Bit 7 6 5 4 Name SSE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 Varies Varies Varies 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W Varies Varies Varies Varies OSCICL[6:0] SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xB3 Bit Name 7 SSE Function Spread Spectrum Enable. 0: Spread Spectrum clock dithering disabled. 1: Spread Spectrum clock dithering enabled. 6:0 OSCICL Internal Oscillator Calibration. Factory calibrated to obtain a frequency of 24.5 MHz. Incrementing this register decreases the oscillator frequency and decrementing this register increases the oscillator frequency. The step size is approximately 1% of the calibrated frequency. The recommended calibration frequency range is between 16 and 24.5 MHz. Note: If the Precision Internal Oscillator is selected as the system clock, the following procedure should be used when changing the value of the internal oscillator calibration bits. 1. Switch to a different clock source. 2. Disable the oscillator by writing OSCICN.7 to 0. 3. Change OSCICL to the desired setting. 4. Enable the oscillator by writing OSCICN.7 to 1. 293 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 23.4. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 Name XCLKVLD 5 4 3 2 XOSCMD[2:0] 1 0 XFCN[2:0] Type R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xB1 Bit 7 Name Function XCLKVLD External Oscillator Valid Flag. Provides External Oscillator status and is valid at all times for all modes of operation except External CMOS Clock Mode and External CMOS Clock Mode with divide by 2. In these modes, XCLKVLD always returns 0. 0: External Oscillator is unused or not yet stable. 1: External Oscillator is running and stable. 6:4 XOSCMD External Oscillator Mode Bits. Configures the external oscillator circuit to the selected mode. 00x: External Oscillator circuit disabled. 010: External CMOS Clock Mode. 011: External CMOS Clock Mode with divide by 2 stage. 100: RC Oscillator Mode. 101: Capacitor Oscillator Mode. 110: Crystal Oscillator Mode. 111: Crystal Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage. 3 2:0 Reserved Read = 0b. Must Write 0b. XFCN External Oscillator Frequency Control Bits. Controls the external oscillator bias current. 000-111: See Table 23.1 on page 288 (Crystal Mode) or Table 23.2 on page 289 (RC or C Mode) for recommended settings. Rev. 1.0 294 C8051F96x 295 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 24. SmaRTClock (Real Time Clock) C8051F96x devices include an ultra low power 32-bit SmaRTClock Peripheral (Real Time Clock) with alarm. The SmaRTClock has a dedicated 32 kHz oscillator that can be configured for use with or without a crystal. No external resistor or loading capacitors are required. The on-chip loading capacitors are programmable to 16 discrete levels allowing compatibility with a wide range of crystals. The SmaRTClock can operate directly from a 1.8–3.6 V battery voltage and remains operational even when the device goes into its lowest power down mode. The SmaRTClock output can be buffered and routed to a GPIO pin to provide an accurate, low frequency clock to other devices while the MCU is in its lowest power down mode (see “PMU0MD: Power Management Unit Mode” on page 267 for more details). C8051F96x devices also support an ultra low power internal LFO that reduces sleep mode current. The SmaRTClock allows a maximum of 36 hour 32-bit independent time-keeping when used with a 32.768 kHz Watch Crystal. The SmaRTClock provides an Alarm and Missing SmaRTClock events, which could be used as reset or wakeup sources. See Section “22. Reset Sources” on page 278 and Section “19. Power Management” on page 257 for details on reset sources and low power mode wake-up sources, respectively. XTAL3 XTAL4 RTCOUT SmaRTClock LFO Programmable Load Capacitors SmaRTClock Oscillator CIP-51 CPU 32-Bit SmaRTClock Timer SmaRTClock State Machine w/ 3 Independent Alarms Wake-Up Interrupt Internal Registers CAPTUREn RTC0CN RTC0XCN RTC0XCF RTC0CF ALARMnBn Power/ Clock Mgmt Interface Registers RTC0KEY RTC0ADR RTC0DAT Figure 24.1. SmaRTClock Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 295 C8051F96x 24.1. SmaRTClock Interface The SmaRTClock Interface consists of three registers: RTC0KEY, RTC0ADR, and RTC0DAT. These interface registers are located on the CIP-51’s SFR map and provide access to the SmaRTClock internal registers listed in Table 24.1. The SmaRTClock internal registers can only be accessed indirectly through the SmaRTClock Interface. Table 24.1. SmaRTClock Internal Registers SmaRTClock SmaRTClock Address Register Register Name Description 0x00–0x03 CAPTUREn SmaRTClock Capture Registers Four Registers used for setting the 32-bit SmaRTClock timer or reading its current value. 0x04 RTC0CN SmaRTClock Control Register Controls the operation of the SmaRTClock State Machine. 0x05 RTC0XCN SmaRTClock Oscillator Control Register Controls the operation of the SmaRTClock Oscillator. 0x06 RTC0XCF SmaRTClock Oscillator Configuration Register Controls the value of the progammable oscillator load capacitance and enables/disables AutoStep. 0x07 RTC0CF SmaRTClock Configuration Register Contains an alarm enable and flag for each SmaRTClock alarm. 0x08–0x0B ALARM0Bn SmaRTClock Alarm Registers Four registers used for setting or reading the 32-bit SmaRTClock alarm value. 0x0C–0x0F ALARM1Bn SmaRTClock Alarm Registers Four registers used for setting or reading the 32-bit SmaRTClock alarm value. 0x10–0x13 ALARM2Bn SmaRTClock Alarm Registers Four registers used for setting or reading the 32-bit SmaRTClock alarm value. 296 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 24.1.1. SmaRTClock Lock and Key Functions The SmaRTClock Interface has an RTC0KEY register for legacy reasons, however, all writes to this register are ignored. The SmaRTClock interface is always unlocked on C8051F96x. 24.1.2. Using RTC0ADR and RTC0DAT to Access SmaRTClock Internal Registers The SmaRTClock internal registers can be read and written using RTC0ADR and RTC0DAT. The RTC0ADR register selects the SmaRTClock internal register that will be targeted by subsequent reads or writes. A SmaRTClock Write operation is initiated by writing to the RTC0DAT register. Below is an example of writing to a SmaRTClock internal register. 1. Write 0x05 to RTC0ADR. This selects the internal RTC0CN register at SmaRTClock Address 0x05. 2. Write 0x00 to RTC0DAT. This operation writes 0x00 to the internal RTC0CN register. A SmaRTClock Read operation is initiated by writing the register address to RTC0ADR and reading from RTC0DAT. Below is an example of reading a SmaRTClock internal register. 1. Write 0x05 to RTC0ADR. This selects the internal RTC0CN register at SmaRTClock Address 0x05. 2. Read data from RTC0DAT. This data is a copy of the RTC0CN register. 24.1.3. SmaRTClock Interface Autoread Feature When Autoread is enabled, each read from RTC0DAT initiates the next indirect read operation on the SmaRTClock internal register selected by RTC0ADR. Software should set the register address once at the beginning of each series of consecutive reads. Autoread is enabled by setting AUTORD (RTC0ADR.6) to logic 1. 24.1.4. RTC0ADR Autoincrement Feature For ease of reading and writing the 32-bit CAPTURE and ALARM values, RTC0ADR automatically increments after each read or write to a CAPTUREn or ALARMn register. This speeds up the process of setting an alarm or reading the current SmaRTClock timer value. Autoincrement is always enabled. Recommended Instruction Timing for a multi-byte register read with auto read enabled: mov mov mov mov mov RTC0ADR, #040h A, RTC0DAT A, RTC0DAT A, RTC0DAT A, RTC0DAT Recommended Instruction Timing for a multi-byte register write: mov mov mov mov mov RTC0ADR, RTC0DAT, RTC0DAT, RTC0DAT, RTC0DAT, #010h #05h #06h #07h #08h Rev. 1.0 297 C8051F96x SFR Definition 24.1. RTC0KEY: SmaRTClock Lock and Key Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name RTC0ST[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xAE Bit Name 7:0 RTC0ST 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Function SmaRTClock Interface Status. Provides lock status when read. Read: 0x02: SmaRTClock Interface is unlocked. Write: Writes to RTC0KEY have no effect. SFR Definition 24.2. RTC0ADR: SmaRTClock Address Bit 7 Name 6 5 4 3 AUTORD ADDR[4:0] Type R R/W R Reset 0 0 0 R/W 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xAC Bit Name 0 Reserved Read = 0; Write = don’t care. 6 AUTORD SmaRTClock Interface Autoread Enable. Enables/disables Autoread. 0: Autoread Disabled. 1: Autoread Enabled. 4:0 Unused 0 Function 7 5 2 Read = 0b; Write = Don’t Care. ADDR[4:0] SmaRTClock Indirect Register Address. Sets the currently selected SmaRTClock register. See Table 24.1 for a listing of all SmaRTClock indirect registers. Note: The ADDR bits increment after each indirect read/write operation that targets a CAPTUREn or ALARMnBn internal SmaRTClock register. 298 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 24.3. RTC0DAT: SmaRTClock Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name RTC0DAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 SFR Page= 0x0; SFR Address = 0xAD Bit Name 7:0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function RTC0DAT SmaRTClock Data Bits. Holds data transferred to/from the internal SmaRTClock register selected by RTC0ADR. Note: Read-modify-write instructions (orl, anl, etc.) should not be used on this register. Rev. 1.0 299 C8051F96x 24.2. SmaRTClock Clocking Sources The SmaRTClock peripheral is clocked from its own timebase, independent of the system clock. The SmaRTClock timebase can be derived from an external CMOS clock, the internal LFO, or the SmaRTClock oscillator circuit, which has two modes of operation: Crystal Mode, and Self-Oscillate Mode. The oscillation frequency is 32.768 kHz in Crystal Mode and can be programmed in the range of 10 kHz to 40 kHz in Self-Oscillate Mode. The internal LFO frequency is 16.4 kHz ±20%. The frequency of the SmaRTClock oscillator can be measured with respect to another oscillator using an on-chip timer. See Section “32. Timers” on page 444 for more information on how this can be accomplished. Note: The SmaRTClock timebase can be selected as the system clock and routed to a port pin. See Section “23. Clocking Sources” on page 286 for information on selecting the system clock source and Section “27. Port Input/Output” on page 351 for information on how to route the system clock to a port pin. The SmaRTClock timebase can also be routed to a port pin while the device is in its ultra low power sleep mode. See the PMU0MD register description for details. 24.2.1. Using the SmaRTClock Oscillator with a Crystal or External CMOS Clock When using Crystal Mode, a 32.768 kHz crystal should be connected between XTAL3 and XTAL4. No other external components are required. The following steps show how to start the SmaRTClock crystal oscillator in software: 1. Configure the XTAL3 and XTAL4 pins for Analog I/O. 2. Set SmaRTClock to Crystal Mode (XMODE = 1). 3. Disable Automatic Gain Control (AGCEN) and enable Bias Doubling (BIASX2) for fast crystal startup. 4. Set the desired loading capacitance (RTC0XCF). 5. Enable power to the SmaRTClock oscillator circuit (RTC0EN = 1). 6. Wait 20 ms. 7. Poll the SmaRTClock Clock Valid Bit (CLKVLD) until the crystal oscillator stabilizes. 8. Poll the SmaRTClock Load Capacitance Ready Bit (LOADRDY) until the load capacitance reaches its programmed value. 9. Enable Automatic Gain Control (AGCEN) and disable Bias Doubling (BIASX2) for maximum power savings. 10. Enable the SmaRTClock missing clock detector. 11. Wait 2 ms. 12. Clear the PMU0CF wake-up source flags. In Crystal Mode, the SmaRTClock oscillator may be driven by an external CMOS clock. The CMOS clock should be applied to XTAL3. XTAL34 should be left floating. In this mode, the external CMOS clock is ac coupled into the SmaRTClock and should have a minimum voltage swing of 400 mV. The CMOS clock signal voltage should not exceed VDD or drop below GND. Bias levels closer to VDD will result in lower I/O power consumption because the XTAL3 pin has a built-in weak pull-up. The SmaRTClock oscillator should be configured to its lowest bias setting with AGC disabled. The CLKVLD bit is indeterminate when using a CMOS clock, however, the OSCFAIL bit may be checked 2 ms after SmaRTClock oscillator is powered on to ensure that there is a valid clock on XTAL3. The CLKVLD bit is forced low when BIASX2 is disabled. 300 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 24.2.2. Using the SmaRTClock Oscillator in Self-Oscillate Mode When using Self-Oscillate Mode, the XTAL3 and XTAL4 pins are internally shorted together. The following steps show how to configure SmaRTClock for use in Self-Oscillate Mode: 1. Configure the XTAL3 and XTAL4 pins for analog I/O and disable the digital driver. 2. Set SmaRTClock to Self-Oscillate Mode (XMODE = 0). 3. Set the desired oscillation frequency: For oscillation at about 20 kHz, set BIASX2 = 0. For oscillation at about 40 kHz, set BIASX2 = 1. 4. The oscillator starts oscillating instantaneously. 5. Fine tune the oscillation frequency by adjusting the load capacitance (RTC0XCF). 24.2.3. Using the Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) The low frequency oscillator provides an ultra low power, on-chip clock source to the SmaRTClock. The typical frequency of oscillation is 16.4 kHz ±20%. No external components are required to use the LFO and the XTAL3 and XTAL4 pins may be used for general purpose I/O without any effect on the LFO. The following steps show how to configure SmaRTClock for use with the LFO: 1. Enable and select the Low Frequency Oscillator (LFOEN = 1). 2. The LFO starts oscillating instantaneously. When the LFO is enabled, the SmaRTClock oscillator increments bit 1 of the 32-bit timer (instead of bit 0). This effectively multiplies the LFO frequency by 2, making the RTC timebase behave as if a 32.768 kHz crystal is connected at the output. 24.2.4. Programmable Load Capacitance The programmable load capacitance has 16 values to support crystal oscillators with a wide range of recommended load capacitance. If Automatic Load Capacitance Stepping is enabled, the crystal load capacitors start at the smallest setting to allow a fast startup time, then slowly increase the capacitance until the final programmed value is reached. The final programmed loading capacitor value is specified using the LOADCAP bits in the RTC0XCF register. The LOADCAP setting specifies the amount of on-chip load capacitance and does not include any stray PCB capacitance. Once the final programmed loading capacitor value is reached, the LOADRDY flag will be set by hardware to logic 1. When using the SmaRTClock oscillator in Self-Oscillate mode, the programmable load capacitance can be used to fine tune the oscillation frequency. In most cases, increasing the load capacitor value will result in a decrease in oscillation frequency.Table 24.2 shows the crystal load capacitance for various settings of LOADCAP. Rev. 1.0 301 C8051F96x Table 24.2. SmaRTClock Load Capacitance Settings LOADCAP Crystal Load Capacitance Equivalent Capacitance seen on XTAL3 and XTAL4 0000 4.0 pF 8.0 pF 0001 4.5 pF 9.0 pF 0010 5.0 pF 10.0 pF 0011 5.5 pF 11.0 pF 0100 6.0 pF 12.0 pF 0101 6.5 pF 13.0 pF 0110 7.0 pF 14.0 pF 0111 7.5 pF 15.0 pF 1000 8.0 pF 16.0 pF 1001 8.5 pF 17.0 pF 1010 9.0 pF 18.0 pF 1011 9.5 pF 19.0 pF 1100 10.5 pF 21.0 pF 1101 11.5 pF 23.0 pF 1110 12.5 pF 25.0 pF 1111 13.5 pF 27.0 pF 24.2.5. Automatic Gain Control (Crystal Mode Only) and SmaRTClock Bias Doubling Automatic Gain Control allows the SmaRTClock oscillator to trim the oscillation amplitude of a crystal in order to achieve the lowest possible power consumption. Automatic Gain Control automatically detects when the oscillation amplitude has reached a point where it safe to reduce the drive current, therefore, it may be enabled during crystal startup. It is recommended to enable Automatic Gain Control in most systems which use the SmaRTClock oscillator in Crystal Mode. The following are recommended crystal specifications and operating conditions when Automatic Gain Control is enabled:  ESR < 50 kΩ Load Capacitance < 10 pF  Supply Voltage < 3.0 V  Temperature > –20 °C When using Automatic Gain Control, it is recommended to perform an oscillation robustness test to ensure that the chosen crystal will oscillate under the worst case condition to which the system will be exposed. The worst case condition that should result in the least robust oscillation is at the following system conditions: lowest temperature, highest supply voltage, highest ESR, highest load capacitance, and lowest bias current (AGC enabled, Bias Double Disabled).  To perform the oscillation robustness test, the SmaRTClock oscillator should be enabled and selected as the system clock source. Next, the SYSCLK signal should be routed to a port pin configured as a push-pull digital output. The positive duty cycle of the output clock can be used as an indicator of oscillation robust- 302 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x ness. As shown in Figure 24.2, duty cycles less than 65% indicate a robust oscillation. As the duty cycle approaches 68%, oscillation becomes less reliable and the risk of clock failure increases. Increasing the bias current (by disabling AGC) will always improve oscillation robustness and will reduce the output clock’s duty cycle. This test should be performed at the worst case system conditions, as results at very low temperatures or high supply voltage will vary from results taken at room temperature or low supply voltage. Safe Operating Zone Low Risk of Clock Failure 65% 25% High Risk of Clock Failure Duty Cycle 68% Figure 24.2. Interpreting Oscillation Robustness (Duty Cycle) Test Results As an alternative to performing the oscillation robustness test, Automatic Gain Control may be disabled at the cost of increased power consumption (approximately 200 nA). Disabling Automatic Gain Control will provide the crystal oscillator with higher immunity against external factors which may lead to clock failure. Automatic Gain Control must be disabled if using the SmaRTClock oscillator in self-oscillate mode. Table 24.3 shows a summary of the oscillator bias settings. The SmaRTClock Bias Doubling feature allows the self-oscillation frequency to be increased (almost doubled) and allows a higher crystal drive strength in crystal mode. High crystal drive strength is recommended when the crystal is exposed to poor environmental conditions such as excessive moisture. SmaRTClock Bias Doubling is enabled by setting BIASX2 (RTC0XCN.5) to 1. . Table 24.3. SmaRTClock Bias Settings Mode Crystal Self-Oscillate Setting Power Consumption Bias Double Off, AGC On Lowest Bias Double Off, AGC Off Low Bias Double On, AGC On High Bias Double On, AGC Off Highest Bias Double Off Low Bias Double On High Rev. 1.0 303 C8051F96x 24.2.6. Missing SmaRTClock Detector The missing SmaRTClock detector is a one-shot circuit enabled by setting MCLKEN (RTC0CN.6) to 1. When the SmaRTClock Missing Clock Detector is enabled, OSCFAIL (RTC0CN.5) is set by hardware if SmaRTClock oscillator remains high or low for more than 100 µs. A SmaRTClock Missing Clock detector timeout can trigger an interrupt, wake the device from a low power mode, or reset the device. See Section “17. Interrupt Handler” on page 232, Section “19. Power Management” on page 257, and Section “22. Reset Sources” on page 278 for more information. Note: The SmaRTClock Missing Clock Detector should be disabled when making changes to the oscillator settings in RTC0XCN. 24.2.7. SmaRTClock Oscillator Crystal Valid Detector The SmaRTClock oscillator crystal valid detector is an oscillation amplitude detector circuit used during crystal startup to determine when oscillation has started and is nearly stable. The output of this detector can be read from the CLKVLD bit (RTX0XCN.4). Notes: 1. The CLKVLD bit has a blanking interval of 2 ms. During the first 2 ms after turning on the crystal oscillator, the output of CLKVLD is not valid. 2. This SmaRTClock crystal valid detector (CLKVLD) is not intended for detecting an oscillator failure. The missing SmaRTClock detector (CLKFAIL) should be used for this purpose. 3. The CLKVLD bit output is driven low when BIASX2 is disabled. 24.3. SmaRTClock Timer and Alarm Function The SmaRTClock timer is a 32-bit counter that, when running (RTC0TR = 1), is incremented every SmaRTClock oscillator cycle. The timer has an alarm function that can be set to generate an interrupt, wake the device from a low power mode, or reset the device at a specific time. See Section “17. Interrupt Handler” on page 232, Section “19. Power Management” on page 257, and Section “22. Reset Sources” on page 278 for more information. The SmaRTClock timer includes an Auto Reset feature, which automatically resets the timer to zero one SmaRTClock cycle after the alarm 0 signal is deasserted. When using Auto Reset, the Alarm match value should always be set to 2 counts less than the desired match value. When using the LFO in combination with Auto Reset, the right-justified Alarm match value should be set to 4 counts less than the desired match value. Auto Reset can be enabled by writing a 1 to ALRM (RTC0CN.2). 24.3.1. Setting and Reading the SmaRTClock Timer Value The 32-bit SmaRTClock timer can be set or read using the six CAPTUREn internal registers. Note that the timer does not need to be stopped before reading or setting its value. The following steps can be used to set the timer value: 1. Write the desired 32-bit set value to the CAPTUREn registers. 2. Write 1 to RTC0SET. This will transfer the contents of the CAPTUREn registers to the SmaRTClock timer. 3. Operation is complete when RTC0SET is cleared to 0 by hardware. The following steps can be used to read the current timer value: 1. Write 1 to RTC0CAP. This will transfer the contents of the timer to the CAPTUREn registers. 2. Poll RTC0CAP until it is cleared to 0 by hardware. 3. A snapshot of the timer value can be read from the CAPTUREn registers Notes: 1. If the system clock is faster than 4x the SmaRTClock, then the HSMODE bit should be set to allow the set and capture operations to be concluded quickly (system clock used for transfers). 2. If the system clock is slower than 4x the SmaRTClock, then HSMODE should be set to zero, and RTC must be 304 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x running (RTC0TR = 1) in order to set or capture the main timer. The transfer can take up to 2 smaRTClock cycles to complete. 24.3.2. Setting a SmaRTClock Alarm The SmaRTClock alarm function compares the 32-bit value of SmaRTClock Timer to the value of the ALARMnBn registers. An alarm event is triggered if the SmaRTClock timer is equal to the ALARMnBn registers. If Auto Reset is enabled, the 32-bit timer will be cleared to zero one SmaRTClock cycle after the alarm 0 event. The SmaRTClock alarm event can be configured to reset the MCU, wake it up from a low power mode, or generate an interrupt. See Section “17. Interrupt Handler” on page 232, Section “19. Power Management” on page 257, and Section “22. Reset Sources” on page 278 for more information. The following steps can be used to set up a SmaRTClock Alarm: 1. Disable SmaRTClock Alarm Events (RTC0AEN = 0). 2. Set the ALARMn registers to the desired value. 3. Enable SmaRTClock Alarm Events (RTC0AEN = 1). Notes: 1. The ALRM bit, which is used as the SmaRTClock Alarm Event flag, is cleared by disabling SmaRTClock Alarm Events (RTC0AEN = 0). 2. If AutoReset is disabled, disabling (RTC0AEN = 0) then Re-enabling Alarm Events (RTC0AEN = 1) after a SmaRTClock Alarm without modifying ALARMn registers will automatically schedule the next alarm after 2^32 SmaRTClock cycles (approximately 36 hours using a 32.768 kHz crystal). 24.3.3. Software Considerations for using the SmaRTClock Timer and Alarm The SmaRTClock timer and alarm have two operating modes to suit varying applications. The two modes are described below: Mode 1: The first mode uses the SmaRTClock timer as a perpetual timebase which is never reset to zero. Every 36 hours, the timer is allowed to overflow without being stopped or disrupted. The alarm interval is software managed and is added to the ALRMnBn registers by software after each alarm. This allows the alarm match value to always stay ahead of the timer by one software managed interval. If software uses 32-bit unsigned addition to increment the alarm match value, then it does not need to handle overflows since both the timer and the alarm match value will overflow in the same manner. This mode is ideal for applications which have a long alarm interval (e.g., 24 or 36 hours) and/or have a need for a perpetual timebase. An example of an application that needs a perpetual timebase is one whose wake-up interval is constantly changing. For these applications, software can keep track of the number of timer overflows in a 16-bit variable, extending the 32-bit (36 hour) timer to a 48-bit (272 year) perpetual timebase. Mode 2: The second mode uses the SmaRTClock timer as a general purpose up counter which is auto reset to zero by hardware after each alarm 0 event. The alarm interval is managed by hardware and stored in the ALRM0Bn registers. Software only needs to set the alarm interval once during device initialization. After each alarm 0 event, software should keep a count of the number of alarms that have occurred in order to keep track of time. Alarm 1 and alarm 2 events do not trigger the auto reset. This mode is ideal for applications that require minimal software intervention and/or have a fixed alarm interval. This mode is the most power efficient since it requires less CPU time per alarm. Rev. 1.0 305 C8051F96x Internal Register Definition 24.4. RTC0CN: SmaRTClock Control Bit 7 6 5 4 Name RTC0EN MCLKEN OSCFAIL RTC0TR Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 Varies 0 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address = 0x04 Bit Name 3 2 1 0 HSMODE RTC0SET RTC0CAP Function 7 RTC0EN 6 MCLKEN Missing SmaRTClock Detector Enable. Enables/disables the missing SmaRTClock detector. 0: Missing SmaRTClock detector disabled. 1: Missing SmaRTClock detector enabled. 5 OSCFAIL SmaRTClock Oscillator Fail Event Flag. Set by hardware when a missing SmaRTClock detector timeout occurs. Must be cleared by software. The value of this bit is not defined when the SmaRTClock oscillator is disabled. 4 RTC0TR 3 Reserved Read = 0b; Must write 0b. 2 HSMODE High Speed Mode Enable. Should be set to 1 if the system clock is faster than 4x the SmaRTClock frequency. 0: High Speed Mode is disabled. 1: High Speed Mode is enabled. 1 RTC0SET SmaRTClock Timer Set. Writing 1 initiates a SmaRTClock timer set operation. This bit is cleared to 0 by hardware to indicate that the timer set operation is complete. 0 RTC0CAP SmaRTClock Timer Capture. Writing 1 initiates a SmaRTClock timer capture operation. This bit is cleared to 0 by hardware to indicate that the timer capture operation is complete. 306 SmaRTClock Enable. Enables/disables the SmaRTClock oscillator and associated bias currents. 0: SmaRTClock oscillator disabled. 1: SmaRTClock oscillator enabled. SmaRTClock Timer Run Control. Controls if the SmaRTClock timer is running or stopped (holds current value). 0: SmaRTClock timer is stopped. 1: SmaRTClock timer is running. Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Internal Register Definition 24.5. RTC0XCN: SmaRTClock Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name AGCEN XMODE BIASX2 CLKVLD LFOEN Type R/W R/W R/W R Reset 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address = 0x05 Bit Name 2 1 0 R/W R R R 0 0 0 0 Function 7 AGCEN SmaRTClock Oscillator Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Enable. 0: AGC disabled. 1: AGC enabled. 6 XMODE SmaRTClock Oscillator Mode. Selects Crystal or Self Oscillate Mode. 0: Self-Oscillate Mode selected. 1: Crystal Mode selected. 5 BIASX2 SmaRTClock Oscillator Bias Double Enable. Enables/disables the Bias Double feature. 0: Bias Double disabled. 1: Bias Double enabled. 4 CLKVLD SmaRTClock Oscillator Crystal Valid Indicator. Indicates if oscillation amplitude is sufficient for maintaining oscillation. This bit always reads 0 when BIASX2 is disabled. 0: Oscillation has not started or oscillation amplitude is too low to maintain oscillation. 1: Sufficient oscillation amplitude detected. 3 LFOEN Low Frequency Oscillator Enable and Select. Overrides XMODE and selects the internal low frequency oscillator (LFO) as the SmaRTClock oscillator source. 0: XMODE determines SmaRTClock oscillator source. 1: LFO enabled and selected as SmaRTClock oscillator source. 2:0 Unused Read = 000b; Write = Don’t Care. Rev. 1.0 307 C8051F96x Internal Register Definition 24.6. RTC0XCF: SmaRTClock Oscillator Configuration Bit 7 Name AUTOSTP 6 5 4 3 LOADRDY 2 1 0 LOADCAP Type R/W R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address = 0x06 Bit Name R/W Varies Varies Varies Varies Function 7 AUTOSTP Automatic Load Capacitance Stepping Enable. Enables/disables automatic load capacitance stepping. 0: Load capacitance stepping disabled. 1: Load capacitance stepping enabled. 6 LOADRDY Load Capacitance Ready Indicator. Set by hardware when the load capacitance matches the programmed value. 0: Load capacitance is currently stepping. 1: Load capacitance has reached it programmed value. 5:4 Unused 3:0 LOADCAP 308 Read = 00b; Write = Don’t Care. Load Capacitance Programmed Value. Holds the user’s desired value of the load capacitance. See Table 24.2 on page 302. Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Internal Register Definition 24.7. RTC0CF: SmaRTClock Configuration Bit 7 Name 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ALRM2 ALRM1 ALRM0 AUTORST RTC2EN RTC1EN RTC0EN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address = 0x07 Bit Name 7 Function Reserved Read = 0b; Must write 0b. 6 ALRM2 Event Flag for Alarm 2. This bit must be cleared by software. Writing a ‘1’ to this bit has no effect. 0: An Alarm 2 event has not occured since the last time the flag was cleared. 1: An Alarm 2 event has occured. 5 ALRM1 Event Flag for Alarm 1. This bit must be cleared by software. Writing a ‘1’ to this bit has no effect. 0: An Alarm 1 event has not occured since the last time the flag was cleared. 1: An Alarm 1 event has occured. 4 ALRM0 Event Flag for Alarm 0. This bit must be cleared by software. Writing a ‘1’ to this bit has no effect. 0: An Alarm 0 event has not occured since the last time the flag was cleared. 1: An Alarm 0 event has occured. 3 AUTORST Auto Reset Enable. Enables the Auto Reset function to clear the counter when an Alarm 0 event occurs. 0: Auto Reset is disabled 1: Auto Reset is enabled. 2 RTC2EN Alarm 2 Enable. 0: Alarm 2 is disabled. 1: Alarm 2 is enabled. 1 RTC1EN Alarm 1 Enable. 0: Alarm 1 is disabled. 1: Alarm 1 is enabled. 0 RTC0EN Alarm 0 Enable. 0: Alarm 0 is disabled. 1: Alarm 0 is enabled. Rev. 1.0 309 C8051F96x Internal Register Definition 24.8. CAPTUREn: SmaRTClock Timer Capture Bit 7 6 5 Name 4 3 2 1 0 CAPTURE[31:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Addresses: CAPTURE0 = 0x00; CAPTURE1 = 0x01; CAPTURE2 =0x02; CAPTURE3: 0x03. Bit Name Function 7:0 CAPTURE[31:0] SmaRTClock Timer Capture. These 4 registers (CAPTURE3–CAPTURE0) are used to read or set the 32-bit SmaRTClock timer. Data is transferred to or from the SmaRTClock timer when the RTC0SET or RTC0CAP bits are set. Note: The least significant bit of the timer capture value is CAPTURE0.0. Internal Register Definition 24.9. ALARM0Bn: SmaRTClock Alarm 0 Match Value Bit 7 6 5 Name 4 3 2 1 0 ALARM0[31:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address: ALARM0B0 = 0x08; ALARM0B1 = 0x09; ALARM0B2 = 0x0A; ALARM0B3 = 0x0B Bit Name Function 7:0 ALARM0[31:0] SmaRTClock Alarm 0 Programmed Value. These 4 registers (ALARM0B3–ALARM0B0) are used to set an alarm event for the SmaRTClock timer. The SmaRTClock alarm should be disabled (ALRM0EN=0) when updating these registers. Note: The least significant bit of the alarm programmed value is ALARM0B0.0. 310 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Internal Register Definition 24.10. ALARM1Bn: SmaRTClock Alarm 1 Match Value Bit 7 6 5 Name 4 3 2 1 0 ALARM1[31:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address: ALARM1B0 = 0x0C; ALARM1B1 = 0x0D; ALARM1B2 = 0x0E; ALARM1B3 = 0x0F Bit Name Function 7:0 ALARM1[31:0] SmaRTClock Alarm 1 Programmed Value. These 4 registers (ALARM1B3–ALARM1B0) are used to set an alarm event for the SmaRTClock timer. The SmaRTClock alarm should be disabled (ALRM1EN=0) when updating these registers. Note: The least significant bit of the alarm programmed value is iALARM1B0.0. Internal Register Definition 24.11. ALARM2Bn: SmaRTClock Alarm 2 Match Value Bit 7 6 5 Name 4 3 2 1 0 ALARM2[31:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SmaRTClock Address: ALARM2B0 = 0x10; ALARM2B1 = 0x11; ALARM2B2 = 0x12; ALARM2B3 = 0x13 Bit Name Function 7:0 ALARM2[31:0] SmaRTClock Alarm 2 Programmed Value. These 4 registers (ALARM2B3–ALARM2B0) are used to set an alarm event for the SmaRTClock timer. The SmaRTClock alarm should be disabled (ALRM2EN=0) when updating these registers. Note: The least significant bit of the alarm programmed value is ALARM2B0.0. Rev. 1.0 311 C8051F96x 312 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 25. Low-Power Pulse Counter The C8051F96x family of microcontrollers contains a low-power Pulse Counter module with advanced features, such as ultra low power input comparators, a wide range of pull up values with a self calibration engine, asymmetrical integrators for low pass filtering and switch debounce, single, dual, and quadrature modes of operation, two 24-bit counters, threshold comparators, and a variety of interrupt and sleep wake up capabilities. This combination of features provides water, gas, and heat metering system designers with an optimal tool for saving power while collecting meter usage data. Comparator 0 VBAT PC0DCH PC0CMP0H:M:L PC0DCL 24 PC0PCF PC0 debounce Counter 0 Logic PC1 debounce PC0CTR0H:M:L Counter 1 PC0CTR1H:M:L PC0MD 24 PC0TH Comparator 1 PC0CMP1H:M:L PC0INT0 Figure 25.1. Pulse Counter Block Diagram The low-power Pulse Counter is a low-power sleep-mode peripheral designed primarily to work meters using reed switches, including water and gas meters. The Pulse Counter is very flexible and can count pulses from many different types of sources. The Pulse Counter operates in sleep mode to enable ultra-low power metering systems. The MCU does not have to wake up on every edge or transition and can remain in sleep mode while the Pulse Counter counts pulses for an extended period of time. The Pulse Counter includes two 24-bit counters. These counters can count up to 16,777,215 (224-1) transitions in sleep mode before overflowing. The Pulse Counter can wake up the MCU when one of the counters overflows. The Pulse Counter also has two 24-bit comparators. The comparators have the ability to wake up the MCU when the one of the counters reaches a predetermined threshold. The Pulse Counter uses the RTC clock for sampling, de-bouncing, and managing the low-power pull-up resistors. The RTC must be enabled when counting pulses. The RTC alarms can wake up the MCU periodically to read the pulse counters, instead of using the Pulse Counter comparators. For example, the RTC can wake up the MCU every five minutes. The MCU can then read the Pulse Counter and transmit the information using the UART or a wireless transceiver. Rev. 1.0 312 C8051F96x 25.1. Counting Modes The Pulse Counter supports three different counting modes: single counter mode, dual counter mode, and quadrature counter mode. Figure 25.2 illustrates the three counter modes. Single Counter Mode Example PC0 Dual Counter Mode Example PC1 PC0 Quadrature Counter Mode Example clockwise counter-clockwise clockwise PC1 PC0 Figure 25.2. Mode Examples The single counter mode uses only one Pulse Counter pin PC0 (P1.0) to count pulses from a single input channel. This mode uses only counter 0 and comparator. (Counter 1 and comparator 1 are not used.) The single counter mode supports only one meter-encoder with a single-channel output. A single-channel encoder is an effective solution when the metered fluid flows only in one direction. A single-channel encoder does not provide any direction information and does not support bidirectional fluid metering. The dual counter mode supports two independent single-channel meters. Each meter has its own independent counter and comparator. Some of the global configuration settings apply to both channels, such as pull-up current, sampling rate, and debounce time. The dual mode may also be used for a redundant count using a two-channel non-quadrature encoder. Quadrature counter mode supports a single two-channel quadrature meter encoder. The quadrature counter mode supports bidirectional encoders and applications with bidirectional fluid flow. In quadrature counter mode, clock-wise counts will increment counter 0, while counter clock-wise counts will increment counter 1. Subtracting counter 1 from counter 0 will yield the net position. If the normal fluid flow is clock- 313 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x wise, then the counter clockwise counter 1 value represents the cumulative back-flow. Firmware may use the back-flow counter with the corresponding comparator to implement a back-flow alarm. The clock-wise sequence is (LL-HL-HH-LH), and the counter clock-wise sequence is (LL-LH-HH-HL). (For this sequence LH means PC1 = Low and PC0 = High.) Firmware cannot write to the counters. The counters are reset when PC0MD is written and have their counting enabled when the PC0MD[7:6] mode bits are set to either single, dual, or quadrature modes. The counters only increment and will roll over to 0x000000 after reaching 0xFFFFFF. For single mode, the PC0 input connects to counter 0. In dual mode, the PC0 input connects to counter 0 while the PC1 input connects to counter 1. In Quadrature mode, clock-wise counts are sent to counter 0 while counter clock-wise counts are sent to counter 1. 25.2. Reed Switch Types The Pulse Counter works with both Form-A and Form-C reed switches. A Form-A switch is a NormallyOpen Single-Pole Single-Throw (NO SPST) switch. A Form-C reed switch is a Single-Pole Double-Throw (SPDT) switch. Figure 25.3 illustrates some of the common reed switch configurations for a single-channel meter. The Form-A switch requires a pull-up resistor. The energy used by the pull-up resistor may be a substantial portion of the energy budget. To minimize energy usage, the Pulse Counter has a programmable pull-up resistance and an automatic calibration engine. The calibration engine can automatically determine the smallest usable pull-up strength setting. A Form-C switch does not require a pull-up resistor and will provide a lower power solution. However, the Form-C switches are more expensive and require an additional wire for VBAT. VBAT Form A PC0 pull-up required Form C VBAT no pull-up PC0 Figure 25.3. Reed Switch Configurations Rev. 1.0 314 C8051F96x 25.3. Programmable Pull-Up Resistors The Pulse Counter features low-power pull-up resistors with a programmable resistance and duty-cycle. The average pull-up current will depend on the selected resistor, sample rate, and pull-up duty-cycle multiplier. Example code is available that will calculate the values for the Pull-Up configuration SFR (PC0PCF). Table 25.1through Table 25.3 are used with Equation 25.1 to calculate the average pull-up resistor current. Table 25.4through Table 25.7 give the average current for all combinations. I pull-up = I R × D SR × D PU Equation 25.1. Average Pull-Up Current Where: IR = Pull-up Resistor current selected by PC0PCF[4:2]. DSR = Sample Rate Duty Cycle Multiplier selected by PC0MD[5:4]. DPU = Pull-Up Duty Cycle Multiplier selected by PC0PCF[4:2]. Table 25.1. Pull-Up Resistor Current PC0PCF[4:2] IR 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 0 1 μA 4 μA 16 μA 64 μA 256 μA 1 mA 4 mA Table 25.2. Sample Rate Duty-Cycle Multiplier PC0MD[5:4] DSR 000 001 010 011 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 Table 25.3. Pull-Up Duty-Cycle Multiplier 315 PC0PCF[4:2] DPU 000 001 010 011 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 25.4. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 250 µs) PC0PCF[4:2] Duty Cycle PC0PCF[1:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 00 disabled 250 nA 1.0 µA 4.0 µA 16 µA 64 µA 250 µA 1000 µA 25% 01 disabled 375 nA 1.5 µA 6.0 µA 24 µA 96 µA 375 µA 1500 µA 37.5% 10 disabled 500 nA 2.0 µA 8.0 µA 32 µA 128 µA 500 µA 2000 µA 50% 11 disabled 750 nA 3.0 µA 12.0 µA 48 µA 192 µA 750 µA 3000 µA 75% Table 25.5. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 500 µs) PC0PCF[4:2] Duty Cycle PC0PCF[1:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 00 disabled 125 nA 0.50 µA 2.0 µA 8 µA 32 µA 125 µA 500 µA 12.5% 01 disabled 188 nA 0.75 µA 3.0 µA 12 µA 48 µA 188 µA 750 µA 18.8% 10 disabled 250 nA 1.0 µA 4.0 µA 16 µA 64 µA 250 µA 1000 µA 25% 11 disabled 375 nA 1.5 µA 6.0 µA 24 µA 96 µA 375 µA 1500 µA 37.5% Table 25.6. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 1 ms) PC0PCF[4:2] Duty Cycle PC0PCF[1:0] 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 00 disabled 63 nA 250 nA 1.0 µA 4 µA 16 µA 63 µA 250 µA 6.3% 01 disabled 94 nA 375 nA 1.5 µA 6 µA 24 µA 94 µA 375 µA 9.4% 10 disabled 125 nA 500 nA 2.0 µA 8 µA 32 µA 125 µA 500 µA 12.5% 11 disabled 188 nA 750 nA 3.0 µA 12 µA 48 µA 188 µA 750 µA 18.8% Table 25.7. Average Pull-Up Current (Sample Rate = 2 ms) 00 000 disabled 001 31 nA 010 125 nA PC0PCF[4:2] 011 100 0.50 µA 2.0 µA 101 8 µA 110 31 µA 111 125 µA 01 disabled 47 nA 188 nA 0.75 µA 3.0 µA 12 µA 47 µA 188 µA 4.7% 10 disabled 63 nA 250 nA 1.0 µA 4.0 µA 16 µA 63 µA 250 µA 6.3% 11 disabled 94 nA 375 nA 1.5 µA 6.0 µA 24 µA 94 µA 375 µA 9.4% PC0PCF[1:0] Rev. 1.0 Duty Cycle 3.1% 316 C8051F96x 25.4. Automatic Pull-Up Resistor Calibration The Pulse Counter includes an automatic calibration engine which can automatically determine the minimum pull-up current for a particular application. The automatic calibration is especially useful when the load capacitance of field wiring varies from one installation to another. The automatic calibration uses one of the Pulse Counter inputs (PC0 or PC1) for calibration. The CALPORT bit in the PC0PCF SFR selects either PC0 or PC1 for calibration. The reed switch on the selected input should be in the open state to allow the signal to charge during calibration. The calibration engine can calibrate the pull-ups with the meter connected normally, provided that the reed switch is open during calibration. During calibration, the integrators will ignore the input comparators, and the counters will not be incremented. Using a 250 µs sample rate and a 32 kHz RTCCLK, the calibration time will be 21 ms (28 tests @ 750 µs each) or shorter depending on the pull up strength selected. The calibration will fail if the reed switch remains closed during this entire period. If the reed switch is both opened and closed during the calibration period, the value written into PCCF[4:0] may be larger than what is actually required. The transition flag in the PC0INT1 can detect when the reed switch opens, and most systems with a wheel rotation of 10 Hz or slower should have sufficient high time for the calibration to complete before the next closing of the reed switch. Slowing the sample rate will also increase the calibration time. The same drive strength will used for both PC0 and PC1. The example code for the Pulse Counter includes code for managing the automatic calibration engine. 25.5. Sample Rate The Pulse Counter has a programmable sampling rate. The Pulse Counter samples the state of the reed switches at discrete time intervals based on the RTC clock. The PC0MD SFR sets the sampling rate. The system designer should carefully consider the maximum pulse rate for the particular application when setting the sampling rate and debounce time. Sample rates from 250 µs to 2 ms can be selected to either further reduce power consumption or work with shorter pulse widths. The slowest sampling rate (2 ms) will provide the lowest possible power consumption. 25.6. Debounce Like most mechanical switches, reed switches exhibit switch bouncing that could potentially result in false counts or quadrature errors. The Pulse Counter includes digital debounce logic using a digital integrator that can eliminate false counts due to switch bounce. The input of the integrator connects to the Pulse Counter inputs with the programmable pull-ups. The output connects to the counters. The debounce integrator has two independent programmable thresholds: one for the rising edge (Debounce High) and one for the falling edge (Debounce Low). The PC0DCH (PC0 Debounce Config High) SFR sets the threshold for the rising edge. This SFR sets the number of cumulative high samples required to output a logic high to the counter. The PC0DCL (PC0 Debounce Config Low) SFR sets the threshold for the falling edge. This SFR sets the number of cumulative high samples required to output a logic low to the counter. Note that the debounce does count consecutive samples. Requiring consecutive samples would be susceptible to noise. The digital integrator inherently filters out noise. The system designer should carefully consider the maximum anticipated counter frequency and duty-cycle when setting the debounce time. If the debounce configuration is set too large, the Pulse Counter will not count short pulses. The debounce-high configuration should be set to less than one-half the minimum input pulse high-time. Similarly, the debounce-low configuration should be set to less than one-half the minimum input pulse low-time. The Debounce Timing diagram (Figure 25.4) illustrates the operation of the debounce integrator. The top waveform is the representation of the reed switch (high: open, low: closed) which shows some random switch bounce. The bottom waveform is the final signal that goes into the counter which has the switch bounce removed. Based on the actual reed switch used and sample rate, the switch bounce time may appear shorter in duration than the example in Figure 25.4. The second waveform is the pull-up resistor 317 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x enable signal. The enable signal enables the pull-up resistor when high and disables when low. PC0 is the line to the reed switch. On the right side of PC0 waveform, the line voltage is decreasing towards ground when the pull-up resistors are disabled. Beneath the charging waveform, the arrows represent the sample points. The pulse counter samples the PC0 voltage once the charging completes. The sensed ones and zeros are the sampled data. Finally the integrator waveform illustrates the output of the digital integrator. The integrator is set to 4 initially and counts to down to 0 before toggling the output low. Once the integrator reaches the low state, it needs to count up to 4 before toggling its output to the high state. The debounce logic filters out switch bounce or noise that appears for a short duration. Debounce Debounce Switch Charging Samples PC0 Sensed Integrator (set to 4) Integrator 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 4 4 3 4 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 Integrator Output Figure 25.4. Debounce Timing 25.7. Reset Behavior Unlike most MCU peripherals, an MCU reset does not completely reset the Pulse Counter. This includes a power on reset and all other reset sources. An MCU reset does not clear the counter values. The Pulse Counter SFRs do not reset to a default value upon reset. The 24-bit counter values are persistent unless cleared manually by writing to the PC0MD SFR. Note that if the VBAT voltage ever drops below the minimum operating voltage, this may compromise contents of the counters. The PC0MD register should normally be written only once after reset. The PC0MD SFR is the master mode register. This register sets the counter mode and sample rate. Writing to the PC0MD SFR also resets the other PC0xxx SFRs. Note that the RTC clock will reset on an MCU reset, so counting cannot resume until the RTC clock has been re-started. Firmware should read the reset sources SFR RSTSRC to determine the source of the last reset and initialize the Pulse Counter accordingly. When the pulse counter resets, it takes some time (typically two RTC clock cycles) to synchronize between internal clock domains. The counters do not increment during this synchronization time. 25.8. Wake up and Interrupt Sources The Pulse Counter has multiple interrupt and wake-up source conditions. To enable an interrupt, enable the source in the PC0INT0/1 SFRs and enable the Pulse Counter interrupt using bit 4 of the EIE2 bit register. The Pulse Counter interrupt service routine should read the interrupt flags in PC0INT0/1 to determine the source of the interrupt and clear the interrupt flags. Rev. 1.0 318 C8051F96x To enable the Pulse Counter as a wake up source, enable the source in the PC0INT0/1 SFRs and enable the Pulse Counter as a wake-up source by setting bit 0 (PC0WK) to 1 in the PMU0FL SFR. Upon waking, firmware should read the PMCU0CF and PMU0FL SFRs to determine the wake-up source. If the PC0WK bit is set indicating that the Pulse Counter has woke the MCU, firmware should read the flag bits PC0INT0/1 SFRs to determine the Pulse Counter wake-up source and clear the flag bits before going back to sleep. PC0INT0 includes the more common interrupt and wake-up sources. These include comparator match, counter overflow, and quadrature direction change. PC0INT1 includes interrupt and wake-up sources for the advanced features, including flutter detection and quadrature error. 25.9. Real-Time Register Access Several of the Pulse Counter registers values change in real-time synchronous to the RTC clock. Hardware synchronization between the RTC clock domain and the system clock domain hardware would result in long delays when reading real-time registers. Instead, real-time register values are available instantaneously, but the read must be qualified using the read valid bit (PC0TH bit 0). If the register value does not change during the read access, the read valid bit will be set indicating the last was valid. If the value of the real-time register changes during the read access, the read valid bit is 0, indicating the read was invalid. After an invalid read, firmware must read the register and check the read valid bit again. These 8-bit counter registers need to be qualified using the read valid bit:       PC0STAT PC0HIST PC0INT0 PC0INT1 PC0CTR0L PC0CTC1L The 24-bit counters are three-byte real-time read-only registers that require a special access method for reading. Firmware must read the low-byte (PC0CTR0L and PC0CTR1L) first and qualify using the read valid bit. Reading the low-byte latches the middle and high bytes. If the read valid bit is 0, the read is invalid and firmware must read the low-byte and check the read valid bit again. If the read valid bit is set, the read is valid and the middle and high bytes are also safe to read. Firmware should read the middle and high bytes only after reading the low byte and qualifying with the read valid bit. The 24-bit compators are three-byte real-time read-write registers that require a special access method for writing. Firmware must write the low-byte last. After writing the low-byte, it might take up to two RTC clock cycles for the new comparator value to take effect. System designers should consider the synchronization delay when setting the comparator value. The counter may be incremented before new comparator value takes effect. Setting the comparator to at least 2 counts above the current count will eliminate the chance of missing the comparator match during synchronization. Example code is provided with accessor functions for all the real-time Pulse Counter registers. 25.10. Advanced Features 25.10.1. Quadrature Error The quadrature encoder must only send valid quadrature codes. A valid quadrature sequence consists of four valid states. The quadrature codes are only permitted to transition to one of the adjacent states, and an invalid transition will result in a quadrature error. Note that a quadrature error is likely to occur when first enabling the quadrature counter mode, since the Pulse Counter state machine starts at the LL state and the initial state of the quadrature is arbitrary. It is safe to ignore the first quadrature error immediately after initialization. 319 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 25.10.2. Flutter Detection The flutter detection can be used with either quadrature counter mode or dual counter mode when the two inputs are expected to be in step. Flutter refers to the case where one input continues toggling while the other input stops toggling. This may indicate a broken reed switch or a pressure oscillation when the wheel magnet stops at just the right distance from the reed switch. If a pressure oscillation causes a slight rotational oscillation in the wheel, it could cause a number of pulses on one of the inputs, but not on the other. All four edges are checked by the flutter detection feature (PC1 positive, PC1 negative, PC0 positive, and PC0 negative).When enabled, Flutter detection may be used as an interrupt or wake-up source. 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 PC1 PC0 Next expected pulse Next expected pulse with direction change Flutter detected Figure 25.5. Flutter Example For example, flutter detected on the PC0 positive edge means that 4 edges (positive or negative) were detected on PC1 since the last PC0 positive edge. Each PC0 positive edge resets the flutter detection counter while either PC1 edge increments the counter. There are similar counters for all four edges. The flutter detection circuit provides interrupts or wake-up sources, but firmware must also read the Pulse Counter registers to determine what corrective action, if any, must be taken. On the start of flutter event, the firmware should save both counter values and the PC0HIST register. Once the end of flutter event occurs the firmware should also save both counter values and the PC0HIST register. The stop count on flutter, STPCNTFLTR (PCMD[2]), be used to stop the counters when flutter is occurring (quadrature mode only). For quadrature mode, the opposite counter should be decremented by one. In other words, if the direction was clock-wise, the counter clock-wise counter (counter 1) should be decremented by one to correct for one increment before flutter was detected. For dual mode, two reed switches can be used to get a redundant count. If flutter starts during dual mode, both counters should be saved by firmware. After flutter stops, both counters should be read again. The counter that incremented the most was the one that picked up the flutter. There is also a mode to switch from quadrature to dual (PC0MD[1]) when flutter occurs. This changes the counter style from quadrature (count on any edge of PC1 or PC0) to dual to allow all counts to be recorded. Once flutter ends, this mode switches the counters back to quadrature mode. STPCNTFLTR does not function when PC0MD[1] is set. Rev. 1.0 320 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.1. PC0MD: PC0 Mode Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCMODE[1:0] PCRATE[1:0] DUALCMPL STPCNTFLTR DUALSTCH Type R/W R/W R/W R R/W R 0 1 0 0 Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD9; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name Function 7:6 PCMODE[1:0] Counter Mode 00: Pulse Counter disabled. 01: Single Counter mode. 10: Dual Counter mode. 11: Quadrature Counter mode. 5:4 3 2 PCRATE[1:0] PC Sample Rate 00: 250 µs 01: 500 µs 10: 1 ms 11: 2 ms Reserved STPCNTFLTR Stop Counting on Flutter (Only valid for quadrature counter mode and DUALSTCH off.) 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. 1 DUALSTCH Dual Mode Switch During Flutter (Only valid for quadrature counter mode.) 0: Disabled—quadrature mode remains set during flutter. 1: Enabled—quadrature mode changes to dual during flutter. 0 Reserved Note that writing to this register will clear the counter registers PC0CTR0H:M:L and PC0CTR1H:M:L. 321 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.2. PC0PCF: PC0 Mode Pull-Up Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PUCAL CALRES CALPORT Type R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 PUCAL 1 RES[2:0] SFR Address = 0xD7; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7 2 0 DUTY[1:0] Function Pull-Up Driver Calibration 0: Calibration complete or not running. 1: Start calibration of pull up (Self clearing). Calibration determines the lowest usable pull-up strength. 6 CALRES 5 CALPORT Calibration Result 0: Fail (switch may be closed preventing detection of pull ups). Writes value of 0x11111 to PC0PCF[4:0] 1: Pass (writes calibrated value into PC0PCF[4:0]). Calibration Port 0: Calibration on PC0 only. 1: Calibration on PC1 only. 4:2 RES[2:0] Pull-Up Resistor Select Current with force pull-up on bit set (PC0TH.2=1) and VBAT=3.6V. 000: Pull-up disabled. 001: 1 μA.* 010: 4 μA.* 011: 16 μA.* 100: 64 μA.* 101: 256 μA.* 110: 1 mA.* 111: 4 mA.* *The effective average pull-up current depends on selected resistor, pull-up resistor duty-cycle multiplier, and sample rate duty-cycle multiplier. 1:0 DUTY[1:0] Pull-Up Resistor Duty Cycle Multiplier 000: 1/4 (25%)* 001: 3/8 (37.5%)* 010: 1/2 (50%)* 011: 3/4 (75%)* *The final pull-up resistor duty cycle is the sample rate duty-cycle multiplier times the pull-up duty-cycle multiplier. Rev. 1.0 322 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.3. PC0TH: PC0 Threshold Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCTTHRESHI[1:0] PCTHRESLO[1:0] PDOWN PUP Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W 0 0 0 1 Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE4; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:6 PCTTHRESHI[1:0] RDVALID Function Pulse Counter Input Comparator VIH Threshold (Percentage of VIO.) 10: 50% 11: 55% 00: 59% 01: 63% 5:4 PCTHRESLO[1:0] 3 PDOWN Pulse Counter Input Comparator VIL Threshold (percentage of VIO.) 10: 34% 11: 38% 00: 42% 01: 46% Force Pull-Down On 0: PC0 and PC1 pull-down not forced on. 1: PC0 and PC1 grounded. 2 PUP Force Pull-Up 0: PC0 and PC1 pull-up not forced on continuously. See PC0PCF[1:0] for duty cycle. 1: PC0 and PC1 pulled high continuously to the PC0PCF[4:2] setting. PDOWN overrides PUP setting. 1 Reserved 0 RDVALID Read Valid Holds the status of the last read for real-time registers PC0STAT, PC0HIST, PC0CTR0L, PC0CTR1L, PC0INT0, and PC0INT1. 0: The last read was invalid. 1: The last read was valid. RDVALID is set back to 1 upon reading. 323 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.4. PC0STAT: PC0 Status Bit 7 6 Name FLUTTER 5 4 2 1 0 DIRECTION STATE[1:0] PC1PREV PC0PREV PC1 PC0 RO RO RO RO RO 0 0 0 0 Type RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC1; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7 3 FLUTTER Function Flutter During quadrature mode, a disparity may occur between the number of negative edges of PC1 and PC0 or the number of positive edges of PC1 and PC0. This could indicate flutter on one reed switch or one reed switch may be faulty. 0: No flutter detected. 1: Flutter detected. 6 DIRECTION Direction Only applicable for quadrature mode. (First letter is PC1; second letter is PC0) 0: Counter clock-wise - (LL-LH-HH-HL) 1: Clock-wise - (LL-HL-HH-LH) 5:4 STATE[1:0] PC0 State Current State of Internal State Machine. 3 PC1PREV PC1 Previous Previous Output of PC1 Integrator. 2 PC0PREV PC0 Previous Previous Output of PC0 Integrator. 1 PC1 PC1 Current Output of PC1 Integrator. 0 PC0 PC0 Current Output of PC0 Integrator. Rev. 1.0 324 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.5. PC0DCH: PC0 Debounce Configuration High Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0DCH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xFA; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0DCH[7:0] 0 2 1 0 1 0 0 Function Pulse Counter Debounce High Number of cumulative good samples seen by the integrator before recognizing the input as high. Sampling a low will decrement the count while sampling a high will increment the count. The actual value used is PC0DCH plus one. Switch bounce produces a random looking signal. The worst case would be to bounce low at each sample point and not start incrementing the integrator until the switch bounce settled. Therefore, minimum pulse width should account for twice the debounce time. For example, using a sample rate of 250 µs and a PC0DCH value of 0x13 will look for 20 cumulative highs before recognizing the input as high (250 µs x (16+3+1) = 5 ms). 325 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.6. PC0DCL: PC0 Debounce Configuration Low Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0DCL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF9; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0DCL[7:0] 2 1 0 1 0 0 Function Pulse Counter Debounce Low Number of cumulative good samples seen by the integrator before recognizing the input as low. Setting PC0DCL to 0x00 will disable integrators on both PC0 and PC1. The actual value used is PC0DCL plus one. Sampling a low decrements while sampling a high increments the count. Switch bounce produces a random looking signal. The worst case would be to bounce high at each sample point and not start decrementing the integrator until the switch bounce settled. Therefore, minimum pulse width should account for twice the debounce time. For example, using a sample rate of 1 ms and a PC0DCL value of 0x09 will look for 10 cumulative lows before recognizing the input as low (1 ms x 10 = 10 ms). The minimum pulse width should be 20 ms or greater for this example. If PC0DCL has a value of 0x03 and the sample rate is 500 µs, the integrator would need to see 4 cumulative lows before recognizing the low (500 µs x 4 = 2 ms). The minimum pulse width should be 4 ms for this example. Rev. 1.0 326 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.7. PC0CTR0H: PC0 Counter 0 High (MSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CTR0H[23:16] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xDC; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CTR0H[23:16] 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function PC0 Counter 0 High Byte Bits 23:16 of Counter 0. SFR Definition 25.8. PC0CTR0M: PC0 Counter 0 Middle Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CTR0M[15:8] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD8; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CTR0M[15:8] Function PC0 Counter 0 Middle Byte Bits 15:8 of Counter 0. SFR Definition 25.9. PC0CTR0L: PC0 Counter 0 Low (LSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CTR0L[7:0] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xDA; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CTR0L[7:0] 0 Function PC0 Counter 0 Low Byte Bits 7:0 of Counter 0. Note: PC0CTR0L must be read before PC0CTR0M and PC0CTR0H to latch the count for reading. PC0CTRL must be qualified using the RDVALID bit (PC0TH[0]). 327 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.10. PC0CTR1H: PC0 Counter 1 High (MSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CTR1H[23:16] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xDF; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CTR1H[23:16] 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function PC0 Counter 1 High Byte Bits 23:16 of Counter 1. SFR Definition 25.11. PC0CTR1M: PC0 Counter 1 Middle Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CTR1M[15:8] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xDE; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CTR1M[15:8] Function PC0 Counter 1 Middle Byte Bits 15:8 of Counter 1. SFR Definition 25.12. PC0CTR1L: PC0 Counter 1 Low (LSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CTR1L[7:0] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xDD; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CTR1L[7:0] Function PC0 Counter 1 Low Byte Bits 7:0 of Counter 1. Note: PC0CTR1L must be read before PC0CTR1M and PC0CTR1H to latch the count for reading. Rev. 1.0 328 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.13. PC0CMP0H: PC0 Comparator 0 High (MSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CMP0H[23:16] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE3; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CMP0H[23:16] 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function PC0 Comparator 0 High Byte Bits 23:16 of Counter 0. SFR Definition 25.14. PC0CMP0M: PC0 Comparator 0 Middle Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CMP0M[15:8] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE2; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CMP0M[15:8] Function PC0 Comparator 0 Middle Byte Bits 15:8 of Counter 0. SFR Definition 25.15. PC0CMP0L: PC0 Comparator 0 Low (LSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CMP0L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE1; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CMP0L[7:0] 0 Function PC0 Comparator 0 Low Byte Bits 7:0 of Counter 0. Note: PC0CMP0L must be written last after writing PC0CMP0M and PC0CMP0H. After writing PC0CMP0L, the synchronization into the PC clock domain can take 2 RTC clock cycles. 329 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.16. PC0CMP1H: PC0 Comparator 1 High (MSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CMP1H[23:16] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF3; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CMP1H[23:16] 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function PC0 Comparator 1 High Byte Bits 23:16 of Counter 0. SFR Definition 25.17. PC0CMP1M: PC0 Comparator 1 Middle Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CMP1M[15:8] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF2; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CMP1M[15:8] Function PC0 Comparator 1 Middle Byte Bits 15:8 of Counter 0. SFR Definition 25.18. PC0CMP1L: PC0 Comparator 1 Low (LSB) Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0CMP1L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF1; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0CMP1L[7:0] Function PC0 Comparator 1 Low Byte Bits 7:0 of Counter 0. Note: PC0CMP1L must be written last after writing PC0CMP1M and PC0CMP1H. After writing PC0CMP1L the synchronization into the PC clock domain can take 2 RTC clock cycles. Rev. 1.0 330 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.19. PC0HIST: PC0 History Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name PC0HIST[7:0] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF4; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7:0 PC0HIST[7:0] 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function PC0 History. Contains the last 8 recorded directions (1: clock-wise, 0: counter clock-wise) on the previous 8 counts. Values of 0x55 or 0xAA may indicate flutter during quadrature mode. 331 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.20. PC0INT0: PC0 Interrupt 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Name CMP1F CMP1EN CMP0F CMP0EN OVRF OVREN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xFB; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name 7 CMP1F 6 CMP1EN 5 CMP0F 4 CMP0EN 3 OVRF 2 OVREN 1 DIRCHGF 0 DIRCHGEN 1 0 DIRCHGF DIRCHGEN Function Comparator 1 Flag 0: Counter 1 did not match comparator 1 value. 1: Counter 1 matched comparator 1 value. Comparator 1 Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:CMP1F not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:CMP1F enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. Comparator 0 Flag 0: Counter 0 did not match comparator 0 value. 1: Counter 0 matched comparator 0 value. Comparator 0 Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:CMP0F not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:CMP0F enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. Counter Overflow Flag 1:Neither of the counters has overflowed. 1:One of the counters has overflowed. Counter Overflow Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:OVRF not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:OVRF enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. Direction Change Flag Direction changed for quadrature mode only. 0:No change in direction detected. 1:Direction Change detected. Direction Change Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:DIRCHGF not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:DIRCHGF enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. Rev. 1.0 332 C8051F96x SFR Definition 25.21. PC0INT1: PC0 Interrupt 1 Bit 7 6 5 Name FLTRSTRF FLTRSTREN FLTRSTPF 4 3 2 FLTRSTPEN ERRORF ERROREN 1 0 TRANSF TRANSEN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xFC; SFR Page = 0x2 Bit Name Function 7 FLTRSTRF Flutter Start Flag Flutter detection for quadrature mode or dual mode only. 0: No flutter detected. 1: Start of flutter detected. 6 FLTRSTREN Flutter Start Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:FLTRSTRF not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:FLTRSTRF enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 5 FLTRSTPF Flutter Stop Flag Flutter detection for quadrature mode or dual mode only. 0: No flutter stop detected. 1: Flutter stop detected. 4 FLTRSTPEN Flutter Stop Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:FLTRSTPF not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:FLTRSTPF enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 3 ERRORF 2 ERROREN 1 TRANSF 0 TRANSEN 333 Quadrature Error Flag 0: No Quadrature Error detected. 1: Quadrature Error detected. Quadrature Error Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0:ERRORF not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1:ERRORF enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. Transition Flag 0: No transition detected. 1: Transition detected on PC0 or PC1. Transition Interrupt/Wake-up Source Enable 0: TRANSF not enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. 1: TRANSF enabled as interrupt or wake-up source. Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 26. LCD Segment Driver C8051F96x devices contain an LCD segment driver and on-chip bias generation that supports static, 2mux, 3-mux and 4-mux LCDs with 1/2 or 1/3 bias. The on-chip charge pump with programmable output voltage allows software contrast control which is independent of the supply voltage. LCD timing is derived from the SmaRTClock oscillator to allow precise control over the refresh rate. The C8051F96x uses special function registers (SFRs) to store the enabled/disabled state of individual LCD segments. All LCD waveforms are generated on-chip based on the contents of the LCD0Dn registers An LCD blinking function is also supported. A block diagram of the LCD segment driver is shown in Figure 26.1. 10 uF VLCD VBAT Charge Pump SmaRTClock Clock Divider LCD Segment Driver Power Management LCD Clock Bias Generator 32 Segment Pins LCD State Machine Port Drivers Configuration Registers Data Registers 4 COM Pins Figure 26.1. LCD Segment Driver Block Diagram 26.1. Configuring the LCD Segment Driver The LCD segment driver supports multiple mux options: static, 2-mux, 3-mux, and 4-mux mode. It also supports 1/2 and 1/3 bias options. The desired mux mode and bias is configured through the LCD0CN register. A divide value may also be applied to the SmaRTClock output before being used as the LCD0 clock source. The following procedure is recommended for using the LCD Segment Driver: 1. Initialize the SmaRTClock and configure the LCD clock divide settings in the LCD0CN register. 2. Determine the GPIO pins which will be used for the LCD function. 3. Configure the Port I/O pins to be used for LCD as Analog I/O. 4. Configure the LCD size, mux mode, and bias using the LCD0CN register. 5. Enable the LCD bias and clock gate by writing 0x50 to the LCD0MSCN register. 6. Configure the device into the desired Contrast Control Mode. 7. If VIO is internally or externally shorted to VBAT, disable the VLCD/VIO Supply Comparator using the Rev. 1.0 334 C8051F96x LCD0CF Register. 8. Set the LCD contrast using the LCD0CNTRST register. 9. Set the desired threshold for the VBAT Supply Monitor. 10. Set the LCD refresh rate using the LCD0DIVH:LCD0DIVL registers. 11. Write a pattern to the LCD0Dn registers. 12. Enable the LCD by setting bit 0 of LCD0MSCN to logic 1 (LCD0MSCN |= 0x01). 26.2. Mapping Data Registers to LCD Pins The LCD0 data registers are organized as 16 byte-wide special function registers (LCD0Dn), each halfbyte or nibble in these registers controls 1 LCD output pin. There are 32 nibbbles used to control the 32 segment pins. Each LCD0 segment pin can control 1, 2, 3, or 4 LCD segments depending on the selected mux mode. The least significant bit of each nibble controls the segment connected to the backplane signal COM0. The next to least significant bit controls the segment associated with COM1, the next bit controls the segment associated with COM2, and the most significant bit in the 4-bit nibble controls the segment associated with COM3. In static mode, only the least significant bit in each nibble is used and the three remaining bits in each nibble are ignored. In 2-mux mode, only the two least significant bits are used; in 3-mux mode, only the three least significant bits are used, and in 4-mux mode, each of the 4 bits in the nibble controls one LCD segment. Bits with a value of 1 turn on the associated segment and bits with a value of 0 turn off the associated segment. SFR Definition 26.1. LCD0Dn: LCD0 Data Bit 7 6 5 4 Name 3 2 1 0 LCD0Dn Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page: 0x2 Addresses: LCD0D0 = 0x89, LCD0D1 = 0x8A, LCD0D2 = 0x8B, LCD0D3 = 0x8C, LCD0D4 = 0x8D, LCD0D5 = 0x8E, LCD0D6 = 0x91, LCD0D7 = 0x92, LCD0D8 = 0x93, LCD0D9 = 0x94, LCD0DA = 0x95, LCD0DB = 0x96, LCD0DC = 0x97, LCD0DD = 0x99, LCD0DE = 0x9A, LCD0DF = 0x9B. Bit Name 7:0 LCD0Dn Function LCD Data. Each nibble controls one LCD pin. See “Mapping Data Registers to LCD Pins” on page 335 for additional information. 335 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LCD0DF (Pins: LCD31, LCD30) LCD0DE (Pins: LCD29, LCD28) LCD0DD (Pins: LCD27, LCD26) LCD0DC (Pins: LCD25, LCD24) LCD0DB (Pins: LCD23, LCD22) LCD0DA (Pins: LCD21, LCD20) LCD0D9 (Pins: LCD19, LCD18) LCD0D8 (Pins: LCD17, LCD16) LCD0D7 (Pins: LCD15, LCD14) LCD0D6 (Pins: LCD13, LCD12) LCD0D5 (Pins: LCD11, LCD10) LCD0D4 (Pins: LCD9, LCD8) LCD0D3 (Pins: LCD7, LCD6) LCD0D2 (Pins: LCD5, LCD4) LCD0D1 (Pins: LCD3, LCD2) COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3 COM0 COM1 COM2 LCD0D0 (Pins: LCD1, LCD0) COM3 Bit: Figure 26.2. LCD Data Register to LCD Pin Mapping Rev. 1.0 336 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.2. LCD0CN: LCD0 Control Register Bit 7 Name 6 5 CLKDIV[1:0] 4 3 BLANK SIZE MUXMD[1:0] BIAS R/W R/W Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0x9D Bit 7 6:5 4 Name Function Reserved Read = 0. Must Write 0b. CLKDIV[1:0] LCD0 Clock Divider. Divides the SmaRTClock output for use by the LCD0 module. See Table 4.18 on page 76 for LCD clock frequency range. 00: The LCD clock is the SmaRTClock divided by 1. 01: The LCD clock is the SmaRTClock divided by 2. 10: The LCD clock is the SmaRTClock divded by 4. 11: Reserved. BLANK Blank All Segments. Blanks all LCD segments using a single bit. 0: All LCD segments are controlled by the LCD0Dn registers. 1: All LCD segments are blank (turned off). 3 SIZE LCD Size Select. Selects whether 16 or 32 segment pins will be used for the LCD function. 0: P0 and P1 are used as LCD segment pins. 1: P0, P1, P2, and P3 are used as LCD segment pins. 2:1 0 MUXMD[1:0] LCD Bias Power Mode. Selects the mux mode. 00: Static mode selected. 01: 2-mux mode selected. 10: 3-mux mode selected. 11: 4-mux mode selected. BIAS Bias Select. Selects between 1/2 Bias and 1/3 Bias. This bit is ignored if Static mode is selected. 0: LCD0 is configured for 1/3 Bias. 1: LCD0 is configured for 1/2 Bias. 337 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 26.3. LCD Contrast Adjustment The LCD Bias voltages which determine the LCD contrast are generated using the VBAT supply voltage or the on-chip charge pump. There are four contrast control modes to accomodate a wide variety of applications and supply voltages. The target contrast voltage is programmable in 60 mV steps from 1.9 to 3.72 V. The LCD contrast voltage is controlled by the LCD0CNTRST register and the contrast control mode is selected by setting the appropriate bits in the LCD0MSCN, LCD0MSCF, LCD0PWR, and LCD0VBMCN registers. Note: An external 10 µF decoupling capacitor is required on the VLCD pin to create a charge reservoir at the output of the charge pump. Table 26.1. Bit Configurations to select Contrast Control Modes Mode LCD0MSCN.2 LCD0MSCF.0 LCD0PWR.3 LCD0VBMCN.7 1 0 1 0 0 2 0 1 1 1 3 1* 0 1 1 4 1* 0 0 1 * May be set to 0 to support increased load currents. 26.3.1. Contrast Control Mode 1 (Bypass Mode) In Contrast Control Mode 1, the contrast control circuitry is disabled and the VLCD voltage follows the VBAT supply voltage, as shown in Figure 26.3. This mode is useful in systems where the VBAT voltage always remains constant and will provide the lowest LCD power consumption. Bypass Mode is selected using the following procedure: 1. Clear Bit 2 of the LCD0MSCN register to 0b (LCD0MSCN &= ~0x04) 2. Set Bit 0 of the LCD0MSCF register to 1b (LCD0MSCF |= 0x01) 3. Clear Bit 3 of the LCD0PWR register to 0b (LCD0PWR &= ~0x08) 4. Clear Bit 7 of the LCD0VBMCN register to 0b (LCD0VBMCN &= ~0x80) VBAT VLCD Figure 26.3. Contrast Control Mode 1 Rev. 1.0 338 C8051F96x 26.3.2. Contrast Control Mode 2 (Minimum Contrast Mode) In Contrast Control Mode 2, a minimum contrast voltage is maintained, as shown in Figure 26.4. The VLCD supply is powered directly from VBAT as long as VBAT is higher than the programmable VBAT monitor threshold voltage. As soon as the VBAT supply monitor detects that VBAT has dropped below the programmed value, the charge pump will be automatically enabled in order to acheive the desired minimum contrast voltage on VLCD. Minimum Contrast Mode is selected using the following procedure: 1. Clear Bit 2 of the LCD0MSCN register to 0b (LCD0MSCN &= ~0x04) 2. Set Bit 0 of the LCD0MSCF register to 1b (LCD0MSCF |= 0x01) 3. Set Bit 3 of the LCD0PWR register to 1b (LCD0PWR |= 0x08) 4. Set Bit 7 of the LCD0VBMCN register to 1b (LCD0VBMCN |= 0x80) VBAT VLCD Figure 26.4. Contrast Control Mode 2 26.3.3. Contrast Control Mode 3 (Constant Contrast Mode) In Contrast Control Mode 3, a constant contrast voltage is maintained. The VLCD supply is regulated to the programmed contrast voltage using a variable resistor between VBAT and VLCD as long as VBAT is higher than the programmable VBAT monitor threshold voltage. As soon as the VBAT supply monitor detects that VBAT has dropped below the programmed value, the charge pump will be automatically enabled in order to acheive the desired contrast voltage on VLCD. Constant Contrast Mode is selected using the following procedure: 1. Set Bit 2 of the LCD0MSCN register to 1b (LCD0MSCN |= 0x04) 2. Clear Bit 0 of the LCD0MSCF register to 0b (LCD0MSCF &= ~0x01) 3. Set Bit 3 of the LCD0PWR register to 1b (LCD0PWR |= 0x08) 4. Set Bit 7 of the LCD0VBMCN register to 1b (LCD0VBMCN |= 0x80) VBAT VLC D Figure 26.5. Contrast Control Mode 3 339 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 26.3.4. Contrast Control Mode 4 (Auto-Bypass Mode) In Contrast Control Mode 4, behavior is identical to Constant Contrast Mode as long as VBAT is greater than the VBAT monitor threshold voltage. When VBAT drops below the programmed threshold, the device automatically enters bypass mode powering VLCD directly from VBAT. The charge pump is always disabled in this mode. Auto-Bypass Mode is selected using the following procedure: 1. Set Bit 2 of the LCD0MSCN register to 1b (LCD0MSCN |= 0x04) 2. Clear Bit 0 of the LCD0MSCF register to 0b (LCD0MSCF &= ~0x01) 3. Clear Bit 3 of the LCD0PWR register to 0b (LCD0PWR &= ~0x08) 4. Set Bit 7 of the LCD0VBMCN register to 1b (LCD0VBMCN |= 0x80) VBAT VLC D Figure 26.6. Contrast Control Mode 4 Rev. 1.0 340 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.3. LCD0CNTRST: LCD0 Contrast Adjustment Bit 7 6 5 4 Name Reserved Reserved Reserved CNTRST Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0x9C Bit 7:5 4:0 341 Name Function Reserved Read = 000. Write = Must write 000. CNTRST Contrast Setpoint. Determines the setpoint for the VLCD voltage necessary to achieve the desired contrast. 00000: 1.90 00001: 1.96 00010: 2.02 00011: 2.08 00100: 2.13 00101: 2.19 00110: 2.25 00111: 2.31 01000: 2.37 01001: 2.43 01010: 2.49 01011: 2.55 01100: 2.60 01101: 2.66 01110: 2.72 01111: 2.78 10000: 2.84 10001: 2.90 10010: 2.96 10011: 3.02 10100: 3.07 10101: 3.13 10110: 3.19 10111: 3.25 11000: 3.31 11001: 3.37 11010: 3.43 11011: 3.49 11100: 3.54 11101: 3.60 11110: 3.66 11111: 3.72 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.4. LCD0MSCN: LCD0 Master Control Bit 7 Name 6 5 4 3 BIASEN DCBIASOE CLKOE 2 1 0 LOWDRV LCDRST LCDEN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xAB Bit Name 7 6 Reserved BIASEN Function Read = 0b. Must write 0b. LCD0 Bias Enable. LCD0 bias may be disabled when using a static LCD (single backplane), contrast control mode 1 (Bypass Mode) is selected, and the VLCD/VIO Supply Comparator is disabled (LCD0CF.5 = 1). It is required for all other modes. 0: LCD0 Bias is disabled. 1: LCD0 Bias is enabled 5 DCBIASOE DCDC Converter Bias Output Enable. (Note 1) 0: The bias for the DCDC converter is gated off. 1: LCD0 provides the bias for the DCDC converter. 4 CLKOE LCD Clock Output Enable. 0: The clock signal to the LCD0 module is gated off. 1: The SmaRTClock provides the undivided clock to the LCD0 Module. 3 2 Reserved LOWDRV Read = 0b. Must write 0b. Charge Pump Reduced Drive Mode. This bit should be set to 1 in Contrast Control Mode 3 and Mode 4 for minimum power consumption. This bit may be set to 0 in these modes to support higher load current requirements. 0: The charge pump operates at full power. 1: The charge pump operates at reduced power. 1 LCDRST LCD0 Reset. Writing a 1 to this bit will clear all the LCD0Dn registers to 0x00. This bit must be cleared by software. 0 LCDEN LCD0 Enable. 0: LCD0 is disabled. 1: LCD0 is enabled. Note 1: To same bias generator is shared by the DCDC Converter and LCD0. Rev. 1.0 342 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.5. LCD0MSCF: LCD0 Master Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DCENSLP CHPBYP Name Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xAC Bit Name 7:2 1 Reserved DCENSLP Function Read = 111111b. Must write 111111b. DCDC Converter Enable in Sleep Mode 0: DCDC is disabled in Sleep Mode. 1: DCDC is enabled in Sleep Mode. 0 CHPBYP LCD0 Charge Pump Bypass This bit should be set to 1b in Contrast Control Mode 1 and Mode 2. 0: LCD0 Charge Pump is not bypassed. 1: LCD0 Charge Pump is bypassed. SFR Definition 26.6. LCD0PWR: LCD0 Power Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 MODE Name Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xA4 Bit Name 7:4 3 Unused MODE 2:0 Reserved 343 Function Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. LCD0 Contrast Control Mode Selection. 0: LCD0 Contrast Control Mode 1 or Mode 4 is selected. 1: LCD0 Contrast Control Mode 2 or Mode 3 is selected. Read = 001b. Must write 001b. Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 26.4. Adjusting the VBAT Monitor Threshold The VBAT Monitor is used primarily for the contrast control function, to detect when VBAT has fallen below a specific threshold. The VBAT monitor threshold may be set independently of the contrast setting or it may be linked to the contrast setting. When the VBAT monitor threshold is linked to the contrast setting, an offset (in 60mV steps) may be configured so that the VBAT monitor generates a VBAT low condition prior to VBAT dropping below the programmed contrast voltage. The LCD0VBMCN register is used to enable and configure the VBAT Monitor. The VBAT monitor may be enabled as a wake-up source to wake up the device from Sleep mode when the battery is getting low. See the Power Management chapter for more details. SFR Definition 26.7. LCD0VBMCN: LCD0 VBAT Monitor Control Bit 7 Name VBATMEN 6 5 4 3 OFFSET 2 1 0 0 0 THRLD[4:0] Type R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 R/W 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xA6 Bit 7 Name Function VBATMEN VBAT Monitor Enable The VBAT Monitor should be enabled in Contrast Control Mode 2, Mode 3, and Mode 4. 0: The VBAT Monitor is disabled. 1: The VBAT Monitor is enabled. 6 OFFSET VBAT Monitor Offset Enable 0: The VBAT Monitor Threshold is independent of the contrast setting. 1: The VBAT Monitor Threshold is linked to the contrast setting. 5 4:0 Unused Read = 0. Write = Don’t Care. THRLD[4:0] VBAT Monitor Threshold If OFFSET is set to 0b, this bit field has the same defintion as the CNTRST bit field and can be programmed independently of the contrast. If OFFSET is set to 1b, this bit field is interpreted as an offset to the currently programmed contrast setting. The LCD0CNTRST register should be written before setting OFFSET to logic 1 and should not be changed as long as VBAT Monitor Offset is enabled. When THRLD[4:0] is set to 00000b, the VBAT monitor threshold is equal to the contrast voltage. When THRLD[4:0] is set to 00001b, the VBAT monitor threshold is one step higher than the contrast voltage. The step size is equal to the step size of the CNTRST bit field. Rev. 1.0 344 C8051F96x 26.5. Setting the LCD Refresh Rate The clock to the LCD0 module is derived from the SmaRTClock and may be divided down according to the settings in the LCD0CN register. The LCD refresh rate is derived from the LCD0 clock and can be programmed using the LCD0DIVH:LCD0DIVL registers. The LCD mux mode must be taken into account when determining the prescaler value. See the LCD0DIVH/LCD0DIVL register descriptions for more details. For maximum power savings, choose a slow LCD refresh rate and the minimum LCD0 clock frequency. For the least flicker, choose a fast LCD refresh rate. SFR Definition 26.8. LCD0CLKDIVH: LCD0 Refresh Rate Prescaler High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Name 1 0 LCD0DIV[9:8] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 R/W 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xAA Bit 7:2 1:0 Name Function Unused Read = 000000. Write = Don’t Care. LCD0DIV[9:8] LCD Refresh Rate Prescaler. Sets the LCD refresh rate according to the following equation: LCD0 Clock Frequency LCD Refresh Rate = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4 × mux_mode × ( LCD0DIV + 1 ) SFR Definition 26.9. LCD0CLKDIVL: LCD Refresh Rate Prescaler Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name LCD0DIV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xA9 Bit 7:0 Name Function LCD0DIV[7:0] LCD Refresh Rate Prescaler. Sets the LCD refresh rate according to the following equation: LCD0 Clock Frequency LCD Refresh Rate = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4 × mux_mode × ( LCD0DIV + 1 ) 345 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 26.6. Blinking LCD Segments The LCD driver supports blinking LCD applications such as clock applications where the “:” separator toggles on and off once per second. If the LCD is only displaying the hours and minutes, then the device only needs to wake up once per minute to update the display. The once per second blinking is automatically handled by the C8051F96x. The LCD0BLINK register can be used to enable blinking on any LCD segment connected to the LCD0 or LCD1 segment pin. In static mode, a maximum of 2 segments can blink. In 2-mux mode, a maximum of 4 segments can blink; in 3-mux mode, a maximum of 6 segments can blink; and in 4-mux mode, a maximum of 8 segments can blink. The LCD0BLINK mask register targets the same LCD segments as the LCD0D0 register. If an LCD0BLINK bit corresponding to an LCD segment is set to 1, then that segment will toggle at the frequency set by the LCD0TOGR register without any software intervention. SFR Definition 26.10. LCD0BLINK: LCD0 Blink Mask Bit 7 6 5 Name 4 3 2 1 0 LCD0BLINK[7:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0x9E Bit 7:0 Name Function LCD0BLINK[7:0] LCD0 Blink Mask. Each bit maps to a specific LCD segment connected to the LCD0 and LCD1 segment pins. A value of 1 indicates that the segment is blinking. A value of 0 indicates that the segment is not blinking. This bit to segment mapping is the same as the LCD0D0 register. Rev. 1.0 346 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.11. LCD0TOGR: LCD0 Toggle Rate Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 Name 1 TOGR[3:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 R/W 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0x9F Bit Name 7:4 Unused TOGR[3:0] 3:0 Function Read = 0000. Write = Don’t Care. LCD Toggle Rate Divider. Sets the LCD Toggle Rate according to the following equation: Refresh Rate × mux_mode × 2 LCD Toggle Rate = ------------------------------------------------------------------------Toggle Rate Divider 0000: Reserved. 0001: Reserved. 0010: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 2. 0011: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 4. 0100: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 8. 0101: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 16. 0110: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 32. 0111: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 64. 1000: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 128. 1001: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 256. 1010: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 512. 1011: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 1024. 1100: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 2048. 1101: Toggle Rate Divider is set to divide by 4096. All other values reserved. 347 0 Rev. 1.0 0 0 C8051F96x 26.7. Advanced LCD Optimizations The special function registers described in this section should be left at their reset value for most systems. Some systems with specific low power or large load requirments will benefit from tweaking the values in these registers to achieve minimum power consumption or maximum drive level. SFR Definition 26.12. LCD0CF: LCD0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CMPBYP Name Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xA5 Bit Name 7:6 5 Reserved CMPBYP Function Read = 00b. Must write 00b. VLCD/VIO Supply Comparator Disable. Setting this bit to ‘1’ disables the supply voltage comparator which determines if the VIO supply is lower than VLCD. This comparator should only be disabled, as a power saving measure, if VIO is internally or externally shorted to VBAT. 4 :0 Reserved Read = 00b. Must write 00000b. SFR Definition 26.13. LCD0CHPCN: LCD0 Charge Pump Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 Name SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xB5 Bit Name 7:0 Reserved Function Must write 0x4B. Rev. 1.0 348 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.14. LCD0CHPCF: LCD0 Charge Pump Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Name SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xAD Bit Name 7:0 Reserved Function Must write 0x60. SFR Definition 26.15. LCD0CHPMD: LCD0 Charge Pump Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Name SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xAE Bit Name 7:0 Reserved Function Must write 0xE9. SFR Definition 26.16. LCD0BUFCN: LCD0 Buffer Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Name SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0x9C Bit Name 7:0 349 Reserved Function Must write 0x44. Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 26.17. LCD0BUFCF: LCD0 Buffer Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Name SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xAC Bit Name 7:0 Reserved Function Must write 0x32. SFR Definition 26.18. LCD0BUFMD: LCD0 Buffer Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 Name SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xB6 Bit Name 7:0 Reserved Function Must write 0x4A. SFR Definition 26.19. LCD0VBMCF: LCD0 VBAT Monitor Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 Name SFR Page = 0x2; SFR Address = 0xAF Bit Name 7:0 Reserved Function Must write 0x0B. Rev. 1.0 350 C8051F96x 351 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 27. Port Input/Output Digital and analog resources are available through 57 I/O pins (C8051F960/2/4/6/8) or 34 I/O pins (C8051F961/3/5/7/9). Port pins are organized as eight byte-wide ports. Port pins can be defined as digital or analog I/O. Digital I/O pins can be assigned to one of the internal digital resources or used as general purpose I/O (GPIO). Analog I/O pins are used by the internal analog resources. P7.0 can be used as GPIO and is shared with the C2 Interface Data signal (C2D). See Section “34. C2 Interface” on page 486 for more details. The designer has complete control over which digital and analog functions are assigned to individual port pins. This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the use of a Priority Crossbar Decoder. See Section 27.3 for more information on the Crossbar. For Port I/Os configured as push-pull outputs, current is sourced from the VIO or VIORF supply pin. On 40pin devices, the VIO and VIORF supply pins are internally tied to VBAT. See Section 27.1 for more information on Port I/O operating modes and the electrical specifications chapter for detailed electrical specifications. Port Match P0MASK, P0MAT P1MASK, P1MAT Highest Priority 2 UART (Internal Digital Signals) Priority Decoder PnMDOUT, PnMDIN Registers 8 8 4 SPI0 SPI1 P1 I/O Cells SMBus 8 CP0 CP1 Outputs 4 Digital Crossbar 8 SYSCLK 7 2 T0, T1 8 8 8 P0 (Port Latches) P0 I/O Cells External Interrupts EX0 and EX1 P0.0 P0.7 P1.0 P1.7 2 PCA Lowest Priority XBR0, XBR1, XBR2, PnSKIP Registers 8 P6 8 (P6.0-P6.7) 1 P7 1 (P7.0) To Analog Peripherals (ADC0, CP0, and CP1 inputs, VREF, IREF0, AGND) P2 I/O Cells P3 I/O Cells P4 I/O Cells P5 I/O Cells P6 I/O Cells P7 To EMIF P2.0 P2.7 P3.0 P3.7 P4.0 P4.7 P5.0 P5.7 P6.0 P6.7 P7.0 To LCD Figure 27.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 351 C8051F96x 27.1. Port I/O Modes of Operation Port pins P0.0–P6.7 use the Port I/O cell shown in Figure 27.2. The supply pin for P1.5–P2.3 is VIORF and the supply for all other GPIOs is VIO. Each Port I/O cell can be configured by software for analog I/O or digital I/O using the PnMDIN registers. P7.0 can only be used for digital functtons and is shared with the C2D signal. On reset, all Port I/O cells default to a digital high impedance state with weak pull-ups enabled. 27.1.1. Port Pins Configured for Analog I/O Any pins to be used as Comparator or ADC input, external oscillator input/output, or AGND, VREF, or Current Reference output should be configured for analog I/O (PnMDIN.n = 0). When a pin is configured for analog I/O, its weak pullup and digital receiver are disabled. In most cases, software should also disable the digital output drivers. Port pins configured for analog I/O will always read back a value of 0 regardless of the actual voltage on the pin. Configuring pins as analog I/O saves power and isolates the Port pin from digital interference. Port pins configured as digital inputs may still be used by analog peripherals; however, this practice is not recommended and may result in measurement errors. 27.1.2. Port Pins Configured For Digital I/O Any pins to be used by digital peripherals (UART, SPI, SMBus, etc.), external digital event capture functions, or as GPIO should be configured as digital I/O (PnMDIN.n = 1). For digital I/O pins, one of two output modes (push-pull or open-drain) must be selected using the PnMDOUT registers. Push-pull outputs (PnMDOUT.n = 1) drive the Port pad to the supply or GND rails based on the output logic value of the Port pin. Open-drain outputs have the high side driver disabled; therefore, they only drive the Port pad to GND when the output logic value is 0 and become high impedance inputs (both high and low drivers turned off) when the output logic value is 1. When a digital I/O cell is placed in the high impedance state, a weak pull-up transistor pulls the Port pad to the supply voltage to ensure the digital input is at a defined logic state. Weak pull-ups are disabled when the I/O cell is driven to GND to minimize power consumption and may be globally disabled by setting WEAKPUD to 1. The user must ensure that digital I/O are always internally or externally pulled or driven to a valid logic state. Port pins configured for digital I/O always read back the logic state of the Port pad, regardless of the output logic value of the Port pin. WEAKPUD (Weak Pull-Up Disable) PnMDOUT.x (1 for push-pull) (0 for open-drain) Supply XBARE (Crossbar Enable) (WEAK) PORT PAD Pn.x – Output Logic Value (Port Latch or Crossbar) PnMDIN.x (1 for digital) (0 for analog) To/From Analog Peripheral GND Pn.x – Input Logic Value (Reads 0 when pin is configured as an analog I/O) Figure 27.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram 352 Supply Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 27.1.3. Interfacing Port I/O to High Voltage Logic All Port I/O configured for digital, open-drain operation are capable of interfacing to digital logic operating at a supply voltage up to VBAT + 2.0 V. An external pull-up resistor to the higher supply voltage is typically required for most systems. 27.1.4. Increasing Port I/O Drive Strength Port I/O output drivers support a high and low drive strength; the default is low drive strength. The drive strength of a Port I/O can be configured using the PnDRV registers. See Section “4. Electrical Characteristics” on page 56 for the difference in output drive strength between the two modes. 27.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog and Digital Functions Port I/O pins P0.0–P2.6 can be assigned to various analog, digital, and external interrupt functions. The Port pins assigned to analog functions should be configured for analog I/O and Port pins assigned to digital or external interrupt functions should be configured for digital I/O. 27.2.1. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Analog Functions Table 27.1 shows all available analog functions that need Port I/O assignments. Port pins selected for these analog functions should have their digital drivers disabled (PnMDOUT.n = 0 and Port Latch = 1) and their corresponding bit in PnSKIP set to 1. This reserves the pin for use by the analog function and does not allow it to be claimed by the Crossbar. Table 27.1 shows the potential mapping of Port I/O to each analog function. Table 27.1. Port I/O Assignment for Analog Functions Analog Function Potentially Assignable Port Pins SFR(s) used for Assignment ADC Input P0.0–P0.7, P1.4–P2.3 ADC0MX, PnSKIP Comparator0 Input P0.0–P0.7, P1.4–P2.3 CPT0MX, PnSKIP Comparator1 Input P0.0–P0.7, P1.4–P2.3 CPT1MX, PnSKIP LCD Pins (LCD0) P2.4–P6.7 PnMDIN, PnSKIP Pulse Counter (PC0) P1.0, P1.1 P1MDIN, PnSKIP Voltage Reference (VREF0) P0.0 REF0CN, PnSKIP Analog Ground Reference (AGND) P0.1 REF0CN, PnSKIP Current Reference (IREF0) P0.7 IREF0CN, PnSKIP External Oscillator Input (XTAL1) P0.2 OSCXCN, PnSKIP External Oscillator Output (XTAL2) P0.3 OSCXCN, PnSKIP SmaRTClock Input (XTAL3) P1.2 P1MDIN, PnSKIP SmaRTClock Output (XTAL4) P1.3 P1MDIN, PnSKIP Rev. 1.0 353 C8051F96x 27.2.2. Assigning Port I/O Pins to Digital Functions Any Port pins not assigned to analog functions may be assigned to digital functions or used as GPIO. Most digital functions rely on the Crossbar for pin assignment; however, some digital functions bypass the Crossbar in a manner similar to the analog functions listed above. Port pins used by these digital functions and any Port pins selected for use as GPIO should have their corresponding bit in PnSKIP set to 1. Table 27.2 shows all available digital functions and the potential mapping of Port I/O to each digital function. Table 27.2. Port I/O Assignment for Digital Functions Digital Function Potentially Assignable Port Pins UART0, SPI0, SPI1, SMBus, Any Port pin available for assignment by the CP0 and CP1 Outputs, SysCrossbar. This includes P0.0–P2.7 pins which tem Clock Output, PCA0, have their PnSKIP bit set to 0. Timer0 and Timer1 External Note: The Crossbar will always assign UART0 and SPI1 pins to fixed locations. Inputs. SFR(s) used for Assignment XBR0, XBR1, XBR2 Any pin used for GPIO P0.0–P7.0 P0SKIP, P1SKIP, P2SKIP External Memory Interface P3.6–P6.7 EMI0CF 27.2.3. Assigning Port I/O Pins to External Digital Event Capture Functions External digital event capture functions can be used to trigger an interrupt or wake the device from a low power mode when a transition occurs on a digital I/O pin. The digital event capture functions do not require dedicated pins and will function on both GPIO pins (PnSKIP = 1) and pins in use by the Crossbar (PnSKIP = 0). External digital even capture functions cannot be used on pins configured for analog I/O. Table 27.3 shows all available external digital event capture functions. Table 27.3. Port I/O Assignment for External Digital Event Capture Functions Digital Function Potentially Assignable Port Pins SFR(s) used for Assignment External Interrupt 0 P0.0–P0.5, P1.6, P1.7 IT01CF External Interrupt 1 P0.0–P0.4, P1.6, P1.7 IT01CF P0.0–P1.7 P0MASK, P0MAT P1MASK, P1MAT Port Match 354 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 27.3. Priority Crossbar Decoder The Priority Crossbar Decoder assigns a Port I/O pin to each software selected digital function using the fixed peripheral priority order shown in Figure 27.3. The registers XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2 defined in SFR Definition 27.1, SFR Definition 27.2, and SFR Definition 27.3 are used to select digital functions in the Crossbar. The Port pins available for assignment by the Crossbar include all Port pins (P0.0–P2.6) which have their corresponding bit in PnSKIP set to 0. From Figure 27.3, the highest priority peripheral is UART0. If UART0 is selected in the Crossbar (using the XBRn registers), then P0.4 and P0.5 will be assigned to UART0. The next highest priority peripheral is SPI1. If SPI1 is selected in the Crossbar, then P2.0–P2.2 will be assigned to SPI1. P2.3 will be assigned if SPI1 is configured for 4-wire mode. The user should ensure that the pins to be assigned by the Crossbar have their PnSKIP bits set to 0. For all remaining digital functions selected in the Crossbar, starting at the top of Figure 27.3 going down, the least-significant unskipped, unassigned Port pin(s) are assigned to that function. If a Port pin is already assigned (e.g., UART0 or SPI1 pins), or if its PnSKIP bit is set to 1, then the Crossbar will skip over the pin and find next available unskipped, unassigned Port pin. All Port pins used for analog functions, GPIO, or dedicated digital functions such as the EMIF should have their PnSKIP bit set to 1. Figure 27.3 shows the Crossbar Decoder priority with no Port pins skipped (P0SKIP, P1SKIP, P2SKIP = 0x00); Figure 27.4 shows the Crossbar Decoder priority with the External Oscillator pins (XTAL1 and XTAL2) skipped (P0SKIP = 0x0C). Important Notes:  The Crossbar must be enabled (XBARE = 1) before any Port pin is used as a digital output. Port output drivers are disabled while the Crossbar is disabled.  When SMBus is selected in the Crossbar, the pins associated with SDA and SCL will automatically be forced into open-drain output mode regardless of the PnMDOUT setting.  SPI0 can be operated in either 3-wire or 4-wire modes, depending on the state of the NSSMD1NSSMD0 bits in register SPI0CN. The NSS signal is only routed to a Port pin when 4-wire mode is selected. When SPI0 is selected in the Crossbar, the SPI0 mode (3-wire or 4-wire) will affect the pinout of all digital functions lower in priority than SPI0.  For given XBRn, PnSKIP, and SPInCN register settings, one can determine the I/O pin-out of the device using Figure 27.3 and Figure 27.4. Rev. 1.0 355 C8051F96x XTAL1 XTAL2 0 1 2 3 4 5 IREF0 AGND PIN I/O P1 CNVSTR SF Signals VREF P0 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 P2 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TX0 RX0 SCK (SPI1) MISO (SPI1) MOSI (SPI1) (*4-Wire SPI Only) NSS* (SPI1) SCK (SPI0) MISO (SPI0) MOSI (SPI0) (*4-Wire SPI Only) NSS* (SPI0) SDA SCL CP0 CP0A CP1 CP1A /SYSCLK CEX0 CEX1 CEX2 CEX3 CEX4 CEX5 ECI T0 T1 0 0 0 0 0 0 P0SKIP[0:7] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P1SKIP[0:7] P2SKIP[0:7] Figure 27.3. Crossbar Priority Decoder with No Pins Skipped 356 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x XTAL1 XTAL2 0 1 2 3 4 5 IREF0 AGND PIN I/O P1 CNVSTR SF Signals VREF P0 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 P2 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TX0 RX0 SCK (SPI1) MISO (SPI1) MOSI (SPI1) (*4-Wire SPI Only) NSS* (SPI1) SCK (SPI0) MISO (SPI0) MOSI (SPI0) (*4-Wire SPI Only) NSS* (SPI0) SDA SCL CP0 CP0A CP1 CP1A /SYSCLK CEX0 CEX1 CEX2 CEX3 CEX4 CEX5 ECI T0 T1 0 0 0 0 0 0 P0SKIP[0:7] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P1SKIP[0:7] P2SKIP[0:7] Figure 27.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder with Crystal Pins Skipped Rev. 1.0 357 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CP1AE CP1E CP0AE CP0E SYSCKE SMB0E SPI0E URT0E Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xE1 Bit Name 7 CP1AE Function Comparator1 Asynchronous Output Enable. 0: Asynchronous CP1 output unavailable at Port pin. 1: Asynchronous CP1 output routed to Port pin. 6 CP1E Comparator1 Output Enable. 0: CP1 output unavailable at Port pin. 1: CP1 output routed to Port pin. 5 CP0AE Comparator0 Asynchronous Output Enable. 0: Asynchronous CP0 output unavailable at Port pin. 1: Asynchronous CP0 output routed to Port pin. 4 CP0E Comparator0 Output Enable. 0: CP1 output unavailable at Port pin. 1: CP1 output routed to Port pin. 3 SYSCKE SYSCLK Output Enable. 0: SYSCLK output unavailable at Port pin. 1: SYSCLK output routed to Port pin. 2 SMB0E SMBus I/O Enable. 0: SMBus I/O unavailable at Port pin. 1: SDA and SCL routed to Port pins. 1 SPI0E SPI0 I/O Enable 0: SPI0 I/O unavailable at Port pin. 1: SCK, MISO, and MOSI (for SPI0) routed to Port pins. NSS (for SPI0) routed to Port pin only if SPI0 is configured to 4-wire mode. 0 URT0E UART0 Output Enable. 0: UART I/O unavailable at Port pin. 1: TX0 and RX0 routed to Port pins P0.4 and P0.5. Note: SPI0 can be assigned either 3 or 4 Port I/O pins. 358 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1 Bit 7 Name 6 5 4 3 SPI1E T1E T0E ECIE PCA0ME[2:0] R/W Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xE2 Bit Name 7 Unused 6 SPI1E 2 0 1 0 0 0 Function Read = 0b; Write = Don’t Care. SPI0 I/O Enable. 0: SPI1 I/O unavailable at Port pin. 1: SCK (for SPI1) routed to P2.0. MISO (for SPI1) routed to P2.1. MOSI (for SPI1) routed to P2.2. NSS (for SPI1) routed to P2.3 only if SPI1 is configured to 4-wire mode. 5 T1E Timer1 Input Enable. 0: T1 input unavailable at Port pin. 1: T1 input routed to Port pin. 4 T0E Timer0 Input Enable. 0: T0 input unavailable at Port pin. 1: T0 input routed to Port pin. 3 ECIE PCA0 External Counter Input (ECI) Enable. 0: PCA0 external counter input unavailable at Port pin. 1: PCA0 external counter input routed to Port pin. 2:0 PCA0ME PCA0 Module I/O Enable. 000: All PCA0 I/O unavailable at Port pin. 001: CEX0 routed to Port pin. 010: CEX0, CEX1 routed to Port pins. 011: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 routed to Port pins. 100: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 CEX3 routed to Port pins. 101: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, CEX3, CEX4 routed to Port pins. 110: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, CEX3, CEX4, CEX5 routed to Port pins. 111: Reserved. Note: SPI1 can be assigned either 3 or 4 Port I/O pins. Rev. 1.0 359 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name WEAKPUD XBARE Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0 and 0xF; SFR Address = 0xE3 Bit Name 7 Function WEAKPUD Port I/O Weak Pullup Disable 0: Weak Pullups enabled (except for Port I/O pins configured for analog mode). 6 XBARE Crossbar Enable 0: Crossbar disabled. 1: Crossbar enabled. 5:0 Unused Read = 000000b; Write = Don’t Care. Note: The Crossbar must be enabled (XBARE = 1) to use any Port pin as a digital output. 360 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 27.4. Port Match Port match functionality allows system events to be triggered by a logic value change on P0 or P1. A software controlled value stored in the PnMAT registers specifies the expected or normal logic values of P0 and P1. A Port mismatch event occurs if the logic levels of the Port’s input pins no longer match the software controlled value. This allows Software to be notified if a certain change or pattern occurs on P0 or P1 input pins regardless of the XBRn settings. The PnMASK registers can be used to individually select which P0 and P1 pins should be compared against the PnMAT registers. A Port mismatch event is generated if (P0 & P0MASK) does not equal (PnMAT & P0MASK) or if (P1 & P1MASK) does not equal (PnMAT & P1MASK). A Port mismatch event may be used to generate an interrupt or wake the device from a low power mode. See Section “17. Interrupt Handler” on page 232 and Section “19. Power Management” on page 257 for more details on interrupt and wake-up sources. SFR Definition 27.4. P0MASK: Port0 Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P0MASK[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page= 0x0; SFR Address = 0xC7 Bit Name 7:0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P0MASK[7:0] Port0 Mask Value. Selects the P0 pins to be compared with the corresponding bits in P0MAT. 0: P0.n pin pad logic value is ignored and cannot cause a Port Mismatch event. 1: P0.n pin pad logic value is compared to P0MAT.n. SFR Definition 27.5. P0MAT: Port0 Match Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P0MAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 SFR Page= 0x0; SFR Address = 0xD7 Bit Name 7 :0 1 1 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function P0MAT[7:0] Port 0 Match Value. Match comparison value used on Port 0 for bits in P0MASK which are set to 1. 0: P0.n pin logic value is compared with logic LOW. 1: P0.n pin logic value is compared with logic HIGH. Rev. 1.0 361 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.6. P1MASK: Port1 Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P1MASK[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page= 0x0; SFR Address = 0xBF Bit Name 7:0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P1MASK[7:0] Port 1 Mask Value. Selects P1 pins to be compared to the corresponding bits in P1MAT. 0: P1.n pin logic value is ignored and cannot cause a Port Mismatch event. 1: P1.n pin logic value is compared to P1MAT.n. Note: SFR Definition 27.7. P1MAT: Port1 Match Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P1MAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xCF Bit Name 7:0 1 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function P1MAT[7:0] Port 1 Match Value. Match comparison value used on Port 1 for bits in P1MASK which are set to 1. 0: P1.n pin logic value is compared with logic LOW. 1: P1.n pin logic value is compared with logic HIGH. Note: 362 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 27.5. Special Function Registers for Accessing and Configuring Port I/O All Port I/O are accessed through corresponding special function registers (SFRs) that are both byte addressable and bit addressable. When writing to a Port, the value written to the SFR is latched to maintain the output data value at each pin. When reading, the logic levels of the Port's input pins are returned regardless of the XBRn settings (i.e., even when the pin is assigned to another signal by the Crossbar, the Port register can always read its corresponding Port I/O pin). The exception to this is the execution of the read-modify-write instructions that target a Port Latch register as the destination. The read-modify-write instructions when operating on a Port SFR are the following: ANL, ORL, XRL, JBC, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ and MOV, CLR or SETB, when the destination is an individual bit in a Port SFR. For these instructions, the value of the latch register (not the pin) is read, modified, and written back to the SFR. Each Port has a corresponding PnSKIP register which allows its individual Port pins to be assigned to digital functions or skipped by the Crossbar. All Port pins used for analog functions, GPIO, or dedicated digital functions such as the EMIF should have their PnSKIP bit set to 1. The Port input mode of the I/O pins is defined using the Port Input Mode registers (PnMDIN). Each Port cell can be configured for analog or digital I/O. This selection is required even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is not automatic. The only exception to this is P2.7, which can only be used for digital I/O. The output driver characteristics of the I/O pins are defined using the Port Output Mode registers (PnMDOUT). Each Port Output driver can be configured as either open drain or push-pull. This selection is required even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is not automatic. The only exception to this is the SMBus (SDA, SCL) pins, which are configured as open-drain regardless of the PnMDOUT settings. The drive strength of the output drivers are controlled by the Port Drive Strength (PnDRV) registers. The default is low drive strength. See Section “4. Electrical Characteristics” on page 56 for the difference in output drive strength between the two modes. Rev. 1.0 363 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.8. P0: Port0 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P0[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = All Pages; SFR Address = 0x80; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Write 7:0 P0[7:0] Read Port 0 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. 0: P0.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P0.n Port pin is logic HIGH. SFR Definition 27.9. P0SKIP: Port0 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P0SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page= 0x0; SFR Address = 0xD4 Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P0SKIP[7:0] Port 0 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 0 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P0.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P0.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. 364 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.10. P0MDIN: Port0 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P0MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page= 0x0; SFR Address = 0xF1 Bit Name 7:0 P0MDIN[7:0] 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function Analog Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P0.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P0.n pin is not configured for analog mode. SFR Definition 27.11. P0MDOUT: Port0 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P0MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xA4 Bit Name 7:0 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P0MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P0MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P0.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P0.n Output is push-pull. Rev. 1.0 365 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.12. P0DRV: Port0 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P0DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xA4 Bit Name 7:0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P0DRV[7:0] Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P0.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P0.n Output has high output drive strength. SFR Definition 27.13. P1: Port1 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = All Pages; SFR Address = 0x90; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Write 7:0 366 P1[7:0] Port 1 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. Rev. 1.0 Read 0: P1.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P1.n Port pin is logic HIGH. C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.14. P1SKIP: Port1 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P1SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xD5 Bit Name 7:0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P1SKIP[7:0] Port 1 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 1 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P1.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P1.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. SFR Definition 27.15. P1MDIN: Port1 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P1MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xF2 Bit Name 7:0 P1MDIN[7:0] 1 1 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function Analog Configuration Bits for P1.7–P1.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P1.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P1.n pin is not configured for analog mode. Rev. 1.0 367 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.16. P1MDOUT: Port1 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P1MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xA5 Bit Name 7:0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P1MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P1.7–P1.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P1MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P1.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P1.n Output is push-pull. SFR Definition 27.17. P1DRV: Port1 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P1DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xA5 Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P1DRV[7:0] Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P1.7–P1.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P1.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P1.n Output has high output drive strength. 368 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.18. P2: Port2 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P2[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = All Pages; SFR Address = 0xA0; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Write 7:0 P2[7:0] Read Port 2 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. 0: P2.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P2.n Port pin is logic HIGH. SFR Definition 27.19. P2SKIP: Port2 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P2SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xD6 Bit Name 7:0 P2SKIP[7:0] 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function Port 1 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 2 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P2.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P2.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. Rev. 1.0 369 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.20. P2MDIN: Port2 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 Name 2 1 0 1 1 1 P2MDIN[6:0] Type Reset 3 R/W 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xF3 Bit Name 7 Reserved 6:0 P2MDIN[3:0] Function Read = 1b; Must Write 1b. Analog Configuration Bits for P2.6–P2.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P2.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P2.n pin is not configured for analog mode. SFR Definition 27.21. P2MDOUT: Port2 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P2MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xA6 Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P2MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P2.7–P2.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P2MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P2.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P2.n Output is push-pull. 370 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.22. P2DRV: Port2 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P2DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0F; SFR Address = 0xA6 Bit Name 7:0 P2DRV[7:0] 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P2.7–P2.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P2.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P2.n Output has high output drive strength. SFR Definition 27.23. P3: Port3 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P3[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = All Pages; SFR Address = 0xB0; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Write 7:0 P3[7:0] Port 3 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. Rev. 1.0 Read 0: P3.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P3.n Port pin is logic HIGH. 371 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.24. P3MDIN: Port3 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P3MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xF1 Bit Name 7:0 P3MDIN[3:0] 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function Analog Configuration Bits for P3.7–P3.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P3.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P3.n pin is not configured for analog mode. SFR Definition 27.25. P3MDOUT: Port3 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P3MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xB1 Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P3MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P3.7–P3.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P3MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P3.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P3.n Output is push-pull. 372 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.26. P3DRV: Port3 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P3DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xA1 Bit Name 7:0 P3DRV[7:0] 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P3.7–P3.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P3.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P3.n Output has high output drive strength. SFR Definition 27.27. P4: Port4 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P4[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xD9 Bit Name Description 7:0 P4[7:0] 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 Write Port 4 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. Rev. 1.0 Read 0: P4.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P4.n Port pin is logic HIGH. 373 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.28. P4MDIN: Port4 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P4MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xF2 Bit Name 7:0 P4MDIN[3:0] 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function Analog Configuration Bits for P4.7–P4.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P4.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P4.n pin is not configured for analog mode. SFR Definition 27.29. P4MDOUT: Port4 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P4MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xF9 Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P4MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P4.7–P4.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P4MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P4.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P4.n Output is push-pull. 374 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.30. P4DRV: Port4 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P4DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xA2 Bit Name 7:0 P4DRV[7:0] 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P4.7–P4.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P4.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P4.n Output has high output drive strength. SFR Definition 27.31. P5: Port5 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P5[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xDA Bit Name Description 7:0 P5[7:0] 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 Write Port 5 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. Rev. 1.0 Read 0: P5.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P5.n Port pin is logic HIGH. 375 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.32. P5MDIN: Port5 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P5MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xF3 Bit Name 7:0 P5MDIN[3:0] 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function Analog Configuration Bits for P5.7–P5.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P5.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P5.n pin is not configured for analog mode. Note: SFR Definition 27.33. P5MDOUT: Port5 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P5MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xFA Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P5MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P5.7–P5.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P5MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P5.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P5.n Output is push-pull. Note: 376 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.34. P5DRV: Port5 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P5DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xA3 Bit Name 7:0 P5DRV[7:0] 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P5.7–P5.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P5.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P5.n Output has high output drive strength. SFR Definition 27.35. P6: Port6 Bit 7 6 5 4 Name P6[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xDB Bit Name Description 7:0 P6[7:0] 3 2 1 0 1 1 1 1 Write Port 6 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic 1: Set output latch to logic value or reads the Port pin HIGH. logic state in Port cells configured for digital I/O. Rev. 1.0 Read 0: P6.n Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P6.n Port pin is logic HIGH. 377 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.36. P6MDIN: Port6 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P6MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xF4 Bit Name 7:0 P6MDIN[3:0] 2 1 0 1 1 1 Function Analog Configuration Bits for P6.7–P6.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup and digital receiver disabled. The digital driver is not explicitly disabled. 0: Corresponding P6.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P6.n pin is not configured for analog mode. SFR Definition 27.37. P6MDOUT: Port6 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P6MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xFB Bit Name 7:0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function P6MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P6.7–P6.0 (respectively). These bits control the digital driver even when the corresponding bit in register P6MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P6.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P6.n Output is push-pull. 378 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.38. P6DRV: Port6 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P6DRV[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xAA Bit Name 7:0 P6DRV[7:0] 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P6.7–P6.0 (respectively). Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: Corresponding P6.n Output has low output drive strength. 1: Corresponding P6.n Output has high output drive strength. SFR Definition 27.39. P7: Port7 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P7.0 Type R R R R R R R R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xDC Bit Name Description 7:1 Unused 0 P7.0 Write Read Read = 0000000b; Write = Don’t Care. Port 7 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic LOW. Sets the Port latch logic value or reads the Port pin 1: Set output latch to logic logic state in Port cells con- HIGH. figured for digital I/O. Rev. 1.0 0: P7.0 Port pin is logic LOW. 1: P7.0 Port pin is logic HIGH. 379 C8051F96x SFR Definition 27.40. P7MDOUT: Port7 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Name 0 P7MDOUT Type R R R R R R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xFC Bit Name Function 7:1 Unused Read = 0000000b; Write = Don’t Care. 0 P7MDOUT Output Configuration Bits for P7.0. These bits control the digital driver. 0: P7.0 Output is open-drain. 1: P7.0 Output is push-pull. SFR Definition 27.41. P7DRV: Port7 Drive Strength Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name P7DRV Type R R R R R R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0xF; SFR Address = 0xAB Bit Name Function 7:1 Unused Read = 0000000b; Write = Don’t Care. 0 P7DRV Drive Strength Configuration Bits for P7.0. Configures digital I/O Port cells to high or low output drive strength. 0: P7.0 Output has low output drive strength. 1: P7.0 Output has high output drive strength. 380 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 28. SMBus The SMBus I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. The SMBus is compliant with the System Management Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I2C serial bus. Reads and writes to the interface by the system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus interface autonomously controlling the serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/20th of the system clock as a master or slave (this can be faster than allowed by the SMBus specification, depending on the system clock used). A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus. The SMBus interface may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. The SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration logic, and START/STOP control and generation. The SMBus peripheral can be fully driven by software (i.e., software accepts/rejects slave addresses, and generates ACKs), or hardware slave address recognition and automatic ACK generation can be enabled to minimize software overhead. A block diagram of the SMBus peripheral and the associated SFRs is shown in Figure 28.1. SMB0CN M T S S A A A S A X T T C R C I SMAO K B K T O R L E D QO R E S T SMB0CF E I B E S S S S N N U X MMMM S H S T B B B B M Y H T F C C B OO T S S L E E 1 0 D SMBUS CONTROL LOGIC Arbitration SCL Synchronization SCL Generation (Master Mode) SDA Control Hardware Slave Address Recognition Hardware ACK Generation Data Path IRQ Generation Control Interrupt Request 00 T0 Overflow 01 T1 Overflow 10 TMR2H Overflow 11 TMR2L Overflow SCL Control S L V 5 S L V 4 S L V 3 S L V 2 S L V 1 SMB0ADR SG L C V 0 S S S S S S S L L L L L L L V V V V V V V MMMMMMM 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SMB0ADM C R O S S B A R N SDA Control SMB0DAT 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 S L V 6 SCL FILTER Port I/O SDA FILTER E H A C K N Figure 28.1. SMBus Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 381 C8051F96x 28.1. Supporting Documents It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents: 1. The I2C-Bus and How to Use It (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor. 2. The I2C-Bus Specification—Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor. 3. System Management Bus Specification—Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum. 28.2. SMBus Configuration Figure 28.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus specification allows any recessive voltage between 3.0 V and 5.0 V; different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. The bi-directional SCL (serial clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply voltage through a pullup resistor or similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an open-drain or open-collector output for both the SCL and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high (recessive state) when the bus is free. The maximum number of devices on the bus is limited only by the requirement that the rise and fall times on the bus not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns, respectively. VDD = 5 V VDD = 3 V VDD = 5 V VDD = 3 V Master Device Slave Device 1 Slave Device 2 SDA SCL Figure 28.2. Typical SMBus Configuration 28.3. SMBus Operation Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave receiver (WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ). The master device initiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. The SMBus interface may operate as a master or a slave, and multiple master devices on the same bus are supported. If two or more masters attempt to initiate a data transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme is employed with a single master always winning the arbitration. Note that it is not necessary to specify one device as the Master in a system; any device who transmits a START and a slave address becomes the master for the duration of that transfer. A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7–1: 7-bit slave address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Bytes that are received (by a master or slave) are acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see Figure 28.3). If the receiving device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a NACK (not acknowledge), which is a high SDA during a high SCL. The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address byte. The direction bit is set to logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation. 382 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The master generates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the transaction is a WRITE operation from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a time waiting for an ACK from the slave at the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits the data waiting for an ACK from the master at the end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the master generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction and free the bus. Figure 28.3 illustrates a typical SMBus transaction. SCL SDA SLA6 START SLA5-0 Slave Address + R/W R/W D7 ACK D6-0 Data Byte NACK STOP Figure 28.3. SMBus Transaction 28.3.1. Transmitter Vs. Receiver On the SMBus communications interface, a device is the “transmitter” when it is sending an address or data byte to another device on the bus. A device is a “receiver” when an address or data byte is being sent to it from another device on the bus. The transmitter controls the SDA line during the address or data byte. After each byte of address or data information is sent by the transmitter, the receiver sends an ACK or NACK bit during the ACK phase of the transfer, during which time the receiver controls the SDA line. 28.3.2. Arbitration A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL and SDA lines remain high for a specified time (see Section “28.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout” on page 384). In the event that two or more devices attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an arbitration scheme is employed to force one master to give up the bus. The master devices continue transmitting until one attempts a HIGH while the other transmits a LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the bus will be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH will detect a LOW SDA and lose the arbitration. The winning master continues its transmission without interruption; the losing master becomes a slave and receives the rest of the transfer if addressed. This arbitration scheme is non-destructive: one device always wins, and no data is lost. 28.3.3. Clock Low Extension SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I2C, which allows devices with different speed capabilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow slower slave devices to communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line LOW to extend the clock low period, effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency. 28.3.4. SCL Low Timeout If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore, the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus protocol specifies that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than 25 ms as a “timeout” condition. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communication no later than 10 ms after detecting the timeout condition. When the SMBTOE bit in SMB0CF is set, Timer 3 is used to detect SCL low timeouts. Timer 3 is forced to reload when SCL is high, and allowed to count when SCL is low. With Timer 3 enabled and configured to Rev. 1.0 383 C8051F96x overflow after 25 ms (and SMBTOE set), the Timer 3 interrupt service routine can be used to reset (disable and re-enable) the SMBus in the event of an SCL low timeout. 28.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 µs, the bus is designated as free. When the SMBFTE bit in SMB0CF is set, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (as defined by the timer configured for the SMBus clock source). If the SMBus is waiting to generate a Master START, the START will be generated following this timeout. A clock source is required for free timeout detection, even in a slave-only implementation. 28.4. Using the SMBus The SMBus can operate in both Master and Slave modes. The interface provides timing and shifting control for serial transfers; higher level protocol is determined by user software. The SMBus interface provides the following application-independent features:         Byte-wise serial data transfers Clock signal generation on SCL (Master Mode only) and SDA data synchronization Timeout/bus error recognition, as defined by the SMB0CF configuration register START/STOP timing, detection, and generation Bus arbitration Interrupt generation Status information Optional hardware recognition of slave address and automatic acknowledgement of address/data SMBus interrupts are generated for each data byte or slave address that is transferred. When hardware acknowledgement is disabled, the point at which the interrupt is generated depends on whether the hardware is acting as a data transmitter or receiver. When a transmitter (i.e., sending address/data, receiving an ACK), this interrupt is generated after the ACK cycle so that software may read the received ACK value; when receiving data (i.e., receiving address/data, sending an ACK), this interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle so that software may define the outgoing ACK value. If hardware acknowledgement is enabled, these interrupts are always generated after the ACK cycle. See Section 28.5 for more details on transmission sequences. Interrupts are also generated to indicate the beginning of a transfer when a master (START generated), or the end of a transfer when a slave (STOP detected). Software should read the SMB0CN (SMBus Control register) to find the cause of the SMBus interrupt. The SMB0CN register is described in Section 28.4.2; Table 28.5 provides a quick SMB0CN decoding reference. 28.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register The SMBus Configuration register (SMB0CF) is used to enable the SMBus Master and/or Slave modes, select the SMBus clock source, and select the SMBus timing and timeout options. When the ENSMB bit is set, the SMBus is enabled for all master and slave events. Slave events may be disabled by setting the INH bit. With slave events inhibited, the SMBus interface will still monitor the SCL and SDA pins; however, the interface will NACK all received addresses and will not generate any slave interrupts. When the INH bit is set, all slave events will be inhibited following the next START (interrupts will continue for the duration of the current transfer). 384 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 28.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection SMBCS1 0 0 1 1 SMBCS0 0 1 0 1 SMBus Clock Source Timer 0 Overflow Timer 1 Overflow Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow The SMBCS1–0 bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used only when operating as a master or when the Free Timeout detection is enabled. When operating as a master, overflows from the selected source determine the absolute minimum SCL low and high times as defined in Equation 28.1. The selected clock source may be shared by other peripherals so long as the timer is left running at all times. For example, Timer 1 overflows may generate the SMBus and UART baud rates simultaneously. Timer configuration is covered in Section “32. Timers” on page 444. 1 T HighMin = T LowMin = ---------------------------------------------f ClockSourceOverflow Equation 28.1. Minimum SCL High and Low Times The selected clock source should be configured to establish the minimum SCL High and Low times as per Equation 28.1. When the interface is operating as a master (and SCL is not driven or extended by any other devices on the bus), the typical SMBus bit rate is approximated by Equation 28.1. f ClockSourceOverflow BitRate = ---------------------------------------------3 Equation 28.2. Typical SMBus Bit Rate Figure 28.4 shows the typical SCL generation described by Equation 28.2. Notice that THIGH is typically twice as large as TLOW. The actual SCL output may vary due to other devices on the bus (SCL may be extended low by slower slave devices, or driven low by contending master devices). The bit rate when operating as a master will never exceed the limits defined by Equation 28.2. Timer Source Overflows SCL TLow SCL High Timeout THigh Figure 28.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation Setting the EXTHOLD bit extends the minimum setup and hold times for the SDA line. The minimum SDA setup time defines the absolute minimum time that SDA is stable before SCL transitions from low-to-high. The minimum SDA hold time defines the absolute minimum time that the current SDA value remains stable after SCL transitions from high-to-low. EXTHOLD should be set so that the minimum setup and hold times meet the SMBus Specification requirements of 250 ns and 300 ns, respectively. Table 28.2 shows the minimum setup and hold times for the two EXTHOLD settings. Setup and hold time extensions are typically necessary when SYSCLK is above 10 MHz. Rev. 1.0 385 C8051F96x Table 28.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times EXTHOLD Minimum SDA Setup Time Minimum SDA Hold Time Tlow – 4 system clocks 0 3 system clocks or 1 system clock + s/w delay* 1 11 system clocks 12 system clocks *Note: Setup Time for ACK bit transmissions and the MSB of all data transfers. When using software acknowledgement, the s/w delay occurs between the time SMB0DAT or ACK is written and when SI is cleared. Note that if SI is cleared in the same write that defines the outgoing ACK value, s/w delay is zero. With the SMBTOE bit set, Timer 3 should be configured to overflow after 25 ms in order to detect SCL low timeouts (see Section “28.3.4. SCL Low Timeout” on page 383). The SMBus interface will force Timer 3 to reload while SCL is high, and allow Timer 3 to count when SCL is low. The Timer 3 interrupt service routine should be used to reset SMBus communication by disabling and re-enabling the SMBus. SMBus Free Timeout detection can be enabled by setting the SMBFTE bit. When this bit is set, the bus will be considered free if SDA and SCL remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (see Figure 28.4). 386 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 28.1. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 Name ENSMB INH BUSY Type R/W R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 3 EXTHOLD SMBTOE SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xC1 Bit Name 7 ENSMB 2 1 0 SMBFTE SMBCS[1:0] R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Function SMBus Enable. This bit enables the SMBus interface when set to 1. When enabled, the interface constantly monitors the SDA and SCL pins. 6 INH SMBus Slave Inhibit. When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus does not generate an interrupt when slave events occur. This effectively removes the SMBus slave from the bus. Master Mode interrupts are not affected. 5 BUSY SMBus Busy Indicator. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0 when a STOP or free-timeout is sensed. 4 EXTHOLD SMBus Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable. This bit controls the SDA setup and hold times according to Table 28.2. 0: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled. 1: SDA Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled. 3 SMBTOE SMBus SCL Timeout Detection Enable. This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus forces Timer 3 to reload while SCL is high and allows Timer 3 to count when SCL goes low. If Timer 3 is configured to Split Mode, only the High Byte of the timer is held in reload while SCL is high. Timer 3 should be programmed to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer 3 interrupt service routine should reset SMBus communication. 2 SMBFTE SMBus Free Timeout Detection Enable. When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods. 1 :0 SMBCS[1:0] SMBus Clock Source Selection. These two bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus bit rate. The selected device should be configured according to Equation 28.1. 00: Timer 0 Overflow 01: Timer 1 Overflow 10:Timer 2 High Byte Overflow 11: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Rev. 1.0 387 C8051F96x 28.4.2. SMB0CN Control Register SMB0CN is used to control the interface and to provide status information (see SFR Definition 28.2). The higher four bits of SMB0CN (MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO) form a status vector that can be used to jump to service routines. MASTER indicates whether a device is the master or slave during the current transfer. TXMODE indicates whether the device is transmitting or receiving data for the current byte. STA and STO indicate that a START and/or STOP has been detected or generated since the last SMBus interrupt. STA and STO are also used to generate START and STOP conditions when operating as a master. Writing a 1 to STA will cause the SMBus interface to enter Master Mode and generate a START when the bus becomes free (STA is not cleared by hardware after the START is generated). Writing a 1 to STO while in Master Mode will cause the interface to generate a STOP and end the current transfer after the next ACK cycle. If STO and STA are both set (while in Master Mode), a STOP followed by a START will be generated. The ARBLOST bit indicates that the interface has lost an arbitration. This may occur anytime the interface is transmitting (master or slave). A lost arbitration while operating as a slave indicates a bus error condition. ARBLOST is cleared by hardware each time SI is cleared. The SI bit (SMBus Interrupt Flag) is set at the beginning and end of each transfer, after each byte frame, or when an arbitration is lost; see Table 28.3 for more details. Important Note About the SI Bit: The SMBus interface is stalled while SI is set; thus SCL is held low, and the bus is stalled until software clears SI. 28.4.2.1. Software ACK Generation When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is cleared to 0, the firmware on the device must detect incoming slave addresses and ACK or NACK the slave address and incoming data bytes. As a receiver, writing the ACK bit defines the outgoing ACK value; as a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value received during the last ACK cycle. ACKRQ is set each time a byte is received, indicating that an outgoing ACK value is needed. When ACKRQ is set, software should write the desired outgoing value to the ACK bit before clearing SI. A NACK will be generated if software does not write the ACK bit before clearing SI. SDA will reflect the defined ACK value immediately following a write to the ACK bit; however SCL will remain low until SI is cleared. If a received slave address is not acknowledged, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected. 28.4.2.2. Hardware ACK Generation When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is set to 1, automatic slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled. More detail about automatic slave address recognition can be found in Section 28.4.3. As a receiver, the value currently specified by the ACK bit will be automatically sent on the bus during the ACK cycle of an incoming data byte. As a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value received on the last ACK cycle. The ACKRQ bit is not used when hardware ACK generation is enabled. If a received slave address is NACKed by hardware, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected, and no interrupt will be generated. Table 28.3 lists all sources for hardware changes to the SMB0CN bits. Refer to Table 28.5 for SMBus status decoding using the SMB0CN register. 388 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 28.2. SMB0CN: SMBus Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MASTER TXMODE STA STO ACKRQ ARBLOST ACK SI Type R R R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xC0; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Read Write 7 MASTER SMBus Master/Slave Indicator. This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus is operating as a master. 0: SMBus operating in slave mode. 1: SMBus operating in master mode. N/A 6 TXMODE SMBus Transmit Mode Indicator. This read-only bit indicates when the SMBus is operating as a transmitter. 0: SMBus in Receiver Mode. 1: SMBus in Transmitter Mode. N/A 5 STA SMBus Start Flag. 0: No Start or repeated Start detected. 1: Start or repeated Start detected. 0: No Start generated. 1: When Configured as a Master, initiates a START or repeated START. 4 STO SMBus Stop Flag. 0: No Stop condition detected. 1: Stop condition detected (if in Slave Mode) or pending (if in Master Mode). 0: No STOP condition is transmitted. 1: When configured as a Master, causes a STOP condition to be transmitted after the next ACK cycle. Cleared by Hardware. 3 ACKRQ SMBus Acknowledge Request. 0: No Ack requested 1: ACK requested N/A 0: No arbitration error. 1: Arbitration Lost N/A 2 ARBLOST SMBus Arbitration Lost Indicator. 1 ACK SMBus Acknowledge. 0: NACK received. 1: ACK received. 0: Send NACK 1: Send ACK 0 SI SMBus Interrupt Flag. 0: No interrupt pending 0: Clear interrupt, and initiate next state machine event. 1: Force interrupt. This bit is set by hardware 1: Interrupt Pending under the conditions listed in Table 15.3. SI must be cleared by software. While SI is set, SCL is held low and the SMBus is stalled. Rev. 1.0 389 C8051F96x Table 28.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMB0CN Bit Set by Hardware When: MASTER • A START is generated. TXMODE • START is generated. • SMB0DAT is written before the start of an SMBus frame. STA STO ACKRQ ARBLOST ACK SI • A START followed by an address byte is received. • A STOP is detected while addressed as a slave. • Arbitration is lost due to a detected STOP. • A byte has been received and an ACK response value is needed (only when hardware ACK is not enabled). • A repeated START is detected as a MASTER when STA is low (unwanted repeated START). • SCL is sensed low while attempting to generate a STOP or repeated START condition. • SDA is sensed low while transmitting a 1 (excluding ACK bits). • The incoming ACK value is low (ACKNOWLEDGE). • A START has been generated. • Lost arbitration. • A byte has been transmitted and an ACK/NACK received. • A byte has been received. • A START or repeated START followed by a slave address + R/W has been received. • A STOP has been received. Cleared by Hardware When: • A STOP is generated. • Arbitration is lost. • A START is detected. • Arbitration is lost. • SMB0DAT is not written before the start of an SMBus frame. • Must be cleared by software. • A pending STOP is generated. • After each ACK cycle. • Each time SI is cleared. • The incoming ACK value is high (NOT ACKNOWLEDGE). • Must be cleared by software. 28.4.3. Hardware Slave Address Recognition The SMBus hardware has the capability to automatically recognize incoming slave addresses and send an ACK without software intervention. Automatic slave address recognition is enabled by setting the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM to 1. This will enable both automatic slave address recognition and automatic hardware ACK generation for received bytes (as a master or slave). More detail on automatic hardware ACK generation can be found in Section 28.4.2.2. The registers used to define which address(es) are recognized by the hardware are the SMBus Slave Address register (SFR Definition 28.3) and the SMBus Slave Address Mask register (SFR Definition 28.4). A single address or range of addresses (including the General Call Address 0x00) can be specified using these two registers. The most-significant seven bits of the two registers are used to define which addresses will be ACKed. A 1 in bit positions of the slave address mask SLVM[6:0] enable a comparison between the received slave address and the hardware’s slave address SLV[6:0] for those bits. A 0 in a bit of the slave address mask means that bit will be treated as a “don’t care” for comparison purposes. In this case, either a 1 or a 0 value are acceptable on the incoming slave address. Additionally, if the GC bit in register SMB0ADR is set to 1, hardware will recognize the General Call Address (0x00). Table 28.4 shows some example parameter settings and the slave addresses that will be recognized by hardware under those conditions. 390 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 28.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1) Hardware Slave Address SLV[6:0] Slave Address Mask SLVM[6:0] GC bit Slave Addresses Recognized by Hardware 0x34 0x7F 0 0x34 0x34 0x7F 1 0x34, 0x00 (General Call) 0x34 0x7E 0 0x34, 0x35 0x34 0x7E 1 0x34, 0x35, 0x00 (General Call) 0x70 0x73 0 0x70, 0x74, 0x78, 0x7C SFR Definition 28.3. SMB0ADR: SMBus Slave Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLV[6:0] GC Type R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xF4 Bit Name 7:1 SLV[6:0] 0 0 0 Function SMBus Hardware Slave Address. Defines the SMBus Slave Address(es) for automatic hardware acknowledgement. Only address bits which have a 1 in the corresponding bit position in SLVM[6:0] are checked against the incoming address. This allows multiple addresses to be recognized. 0 GC General Call Address Enable. When hardware address recognition is enabled (EHACK = 1), this bit will determine whether the General Call Address (0x00) is also recognized by hardware. 0: General Call Address is ignored. 1: General Call Address is recognized. Rev. 1.0 391 C8051F96x SFR Definition 28.4. SMB0ADM: SMBus Slave Address Mask Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLVM[6:0] EHACK Type R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xF5 Bit Name 7 :1 SLVM[6:0] 1 1 1 0 Function SMBus Slave Address Mask. Defines which bits of register SMB0ADR are compared with an incoming address byte, and which bits are ignored. Any bit set to 1 in SLVM[6:0] enables comparisons with the corresponding bit in SLV[6:0]. Bits set to 0 are ignored (can be either 0 or 1 in the incoming address). 0 EHACK Hardware Acknowledge Enable. Enables hardware acknowledgement of slave address and received data bytes. 0: Firmware must manually acknowledge all incoming address and data bytes. 1: Automatic Slave Address Recognition and Hardware Acknowledge is Enabled. 392 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 28.4.4. Data Register The SMBus Data register SMB0DAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just been received. Software may safely read or write to the data register when the SI flag is set. Software should not attempt to access the SMB0DAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SI flag is cleared to logic 0, as the interface may be in the process of shifting a byte of data into or out of the register. Data in SMB0DAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of SMB0DAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously being shifted in. SMB0DAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event of lost arbitration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data or address in SMB0DAT. SFR Definition 28.5. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name SMB0DAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xC2 Bit Name 0 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 Function 7:0 SMB0DAT[7:0] SMBus Data. The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus serial interface or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus serial interface. The CPU can read from or write to this register whenever the SI serial interrupt flag (SMB0CN.0) is set to logic 1. The serial data in the register remains stable as long as the SI flag is set. When the SI flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data in/out and the CPU should not attempt to access this register. 28.5. SMBus Transfer Modes The SMBus interface may be configured to operate as master and/or slave. At any particular time, it will be operating in one of the following four modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave Transmitter, or Slave Receiver. The SMBus interface enters Master Mode any time a START is generated, and remains in Master Mode until it loses an arbitration or generates a STOP. An SMBus interrupt is generated at the end of all SMBus byte frames. Note that the position of the ACK interrupt when operating as a receiver depends on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a receiver, the interrupt for an ACK occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a transmitter, interrupts occur after the ACK, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled or not. 28.5.1. Write Sequence (Master) During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The master in this transfer will be a transmitter during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. The SMBus interface generates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 (WRITE). The master then transmits one or more bytes of serial data. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is generated by the slave. The transfer is ended when the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. Note that the interface will switch to Master Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Master Transmitter interrupt. Rev. 1.0 393 C8051F96x Figure 28.5 shows a typical master write sequence. Two transmit data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. All “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA W A Data Byte A Data Byte A P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) S = START P = STOP A = ACK W = WRITE SLA = Slave Address Received by SMBus Interface Transmitted by SMBus Interface Figure 28.5. Typical Master Write Sequence 28.5.2. Read Sequence (Master) During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The master in this transfer will be a transmitter during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. The SMBus interface generates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 (READ). Serial data is then received from the slave on SDA while the SMBus outputs the serial clock. The slave transmits one or more bytes of serial data. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte. With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK, and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Writing a 1 to the ACK bit generates an ACK; writing a 0 generates a NACK. Software should write a 0 to the ACK bit for the last data transfer, to transmit a NACK. The interface exits Master Receiver Mode after the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will switch to Master Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Master Receiver. Figure 28.6 shows a typical master read sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. The “data byte transferred” interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. 394 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA R A Data Byte A Data Byte N P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) S = START P = STOP A = ACK N = NACK R = READ SLA = Slave Address Received by SMBus Interface Transmitted by SMBus Interface Figure 28.6. Typical Master Read Sequence 28.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave) During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be a receiver during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit (WRITE in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle. If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte. With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK, and then post the interrupt. The appropriate ACK or NACK value should be set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interface exits Slave Receiver Mode after receiving a STOP. Note that the interface will switch to Slave Transmitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Slave Receiver. Figure 28.7 shows a typical slave write sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Rev. 1.0 395 C8051F96x Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA W A Data Byte A Data Byte A P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) S = START P = STOP A = ACK W = WRITE SLA = Slave Address Received by SMBus Interface Transmitted by SMBus Interface Figure 28.7. Typical Slave Write Sequence 28.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave) During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be a receiver during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode (to receive the slave address) when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit (READ in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle. If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are transmitted. If the received slave address is acknowledged, data should be written to SMB0DAT to be transmitted. The interface enters Slave Transmitter Mode, and transmits one or more bytes of data. After each byte is transmitted, the master sends an acknowledge bit; if the acknowledge bit is an ACK, SMB0DAT should be written with the next data byte. If the acknowledge bit is a NACK, SMB0DAT should not be written to before SI is cleared (an error condition may be generated if SMB0DAT is written following a received NACK while in Slave Transmitter Mode). The interface exits Slave Transmitter Mode after receiving a STOP. Note that the interface will switch to Slave Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Slave Transmitter interrupt. Figure 28.8 shows a typical slave read sequence. Two transmitted data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. All of the “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. 396 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Interrupts with Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) S SLA R A Data Byte A Data Byte N P Interrupts with Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) S = START P = STOP N = NACK R = READ SLA = Slave Address Received by SMBus Interface Transmitted by SMBus Interface Figure 28.8. Typical Slave Read Sequence 28.6. SMBus Status Decoding The current SMBus status can be easily decoded using the SMB0CN register. The appropriate actions to take in response to an SMBus event depend on whether hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled or disabled. Table 28.5 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is disabled. Table 28.6 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled. In the tables, STATUS VECTOR refers to the four upper bits of SMB0CN: MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO. The shown response options are only the typical responses; application-specific procedures are allowed as long as they conform to the SMBus specification. Highlighted responses are allowed by hardware but do not conform to the SMBus specification. Rev. 1.0 397 C8051F96x 0 0 1100 0 1000 1 0 A master START was generated. Load slave address + R/W into SMB0DAT. STO ARBLOST 0 X Typical Response Options STA ACKRQ 0 ACK Status Vector Mode Master Transmitter Master Receiver 398 1110 Current SMbus State 0 0 X 1100 1 0 X 1110 0 1 X - Load next data byte into SMB0DAT. 0 0 X 1100 End transfer with STOP. 0 1 X - 1 X - 0 X 1110 Switch to Master Receiver Mode (clear SI without writing new data 0 to SMB0DAT). 0 X 1000 Acknowledge received byte; Read SMB0DAT. 0 0 1 1000 Send NACK to indicate last byte, 0 and send STOP. 1 0 - Send NACK to indicate last byte, and send STOP followed by 1 START. 1 0 1110 Send ACK followed by repeated START. 1 0 1 1110 Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1 and send repeated START. 0 0 1110 Send ACK and switch to Master Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). 0 0 1 1100 Send NACK and switch to Master Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). 0 0 0 1100 A master data or address byte Set STA to restart transfer. 0 was transmitted; NACK Abort transfer. received. A master data or address byte End transfer with STOP and start 1 1 was transmitted; ACK another transfer. received. Send repeated START. 1 0 X A master data byte was received; ACK requested. ACK Values to Write Values Read Next Status Vector Expected Table 28.5. SMBus Status Decoding With Hardware ACK Generation Disabled (EHACK = 0) Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Values to Write STA STO 0 0 0 A slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting NACK received. STOP condition). 0 0 X 0001 0 0 1 A slave byte was transmitted; Load SMB0DAT with next data byte to transmit. ACK received. 0 0 X 0100 0 1 X A Slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting Master to end transfer). error detected. 0 0 X 0001 0 0 X - 0 0 1 0000 If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 data byte; ACK received address 0 1 0100 NACK received address. 0 0 0 - If Write, Acknowledge received address 0 0 1 0000 0 1 0100 0 0 - 0 1110 Current SMbus State Typical Response Options An illegal STOP or bus error Clear STO. 0 X X was detected while a Slave Transmission was in progress. If Write, Acknowledge received address 1 0 X A slave address + R/W was received; ACK requested. Slave Receiver 0010 1 Bus Error Condition Reschedule failed transfer; NACK received address. 1 0 Clear STO. 0 0 X - Lost arbitration while attempt- No action required (transfer ing a STOP. complete/aborted). 0 0 0 - Acknowledge received byte; Read SMB0DAT. 0 0 1 0000 NACK received byte. 0 0 0 - 0 0 X - 1 0 X 1110 Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X 1110 0 A STOP was detected while 0 X addressed as a Slave Transmitter or Slave Receiver. 1 1 X 1 A slave byte was received; 0 X ACK requested. 0001 0000 If Read, Load SMB0DAT with Lost arbitration as master; 0 1 X slave address + R/W received; data byte; ACK received address ACK requested. NACK received address. 0 ACK ACK 0101 ARBLOST Status Vector 0100 ACKRQ Slave Transmitter Mode Values Read Next Status Vector Expected Table 28.5. SMBus Status Decoding With Hardware ACK Generation Disabled (EHACK = 0) 0010 0 1 X Lost arbitration while attempt- Abort failed transfer. ing a repeated START. Reschedule failed transfer. 0001 0 1 X Lost arbitration due to a detected STOP. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 0000 1 1 X Lost arbitration while transmit- Abort failed transfer. ting a data byte as master. Reschedule failed transfer. 0 0 0 - 1 0 0 1110 Rev. 1.0 399 C8051F96x 0 0 1100 0 Master Receiver 0 0 Load slave address + R/W into SMB0DAT. 0 0 0 X 1100 1 0 X 1110 0 1 X - Load next data byte into SMB0DAT. 0 0 X 1100 End transfer with STOP. 0 1 X - 1 X - 0 X 1110 0 1 1000 A master data or address byte Set STA to restart transfer. 0 was transmitted; NACK Abort transfer. received. End transfer with STOP and start A master data or address byte 1 another transfer. 1 was transmitted; ACK Send repeated START. 1 received. Switch to Master Receiver Mode (clear SI without writing new data 0 to SMB0DAT). Set ACK for initial data byte. 1 A master data byte was received; ACK sent. 1000 0 400 0 A master START was generated. STO ARBLOST 0 X Typical Response Options STA ACKRQ 0 ACK Status Vector Mode Master Transmitter 1110 Current SMbus State A master data byte was 0 received; NACK sent (last byte). ACK Values to Write Values Read Next Status Vector Expected Table 28.6. SMBus Status Decoding With Hardware ACK Generation Enabled (EHACK = 1) Set ACK for next data byte; Read SMB0DAT. 0 0 1 1000 Set NACK to indicate next data byte as the last data byte; Read SMB0DAT. 0 0 0 1000 Initiate repeated START. 1 0 0 1110 Switch to Master Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before 0 clearing SI). 0 X 1100 Read SMB0DAT; send STOP. 0 1 0 - Read SMB0DAT; Send STOP followed by START. 1 1 0 1110 Initiate repeated START. 1 0 0 1110 0 X 1100 Switch to Master Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before 0 clearing SI). Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Values to Write STA STO 0 0 0 A slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting NACK received. STOP condition). 0 0 X 0001 0 0 1 A slave byte was transmitted; Load SMB0DAT with next data byte to transmit. ACK received. 0 0 X 0100 0 1 X A Slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting Master to end transfer). error detected. 0 0 X 0001 0 0 X — If Write, Set ACK for first data byte. 0 0 1 0000 If Read, Load SMB0DAT with data byte 0 0 X 0100 If Write, Set ACK for first data byte. 0 0 1 0000 0 0 X 0100 Reschedule failed transfer 1 0 X 1110 Clear STO. 0 0 X — Lost arbitration while attempt- No action required (transfer ing a STOP. complete/aborted). 0 0 0 — Set ACK for next data byte; Read SMB0DAT. 0 0 1 0000 Set NACK for next data byte; Read SMB0DAT. 0 0 0 0000 0 0 X — 1 0 X 1110 Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — Current SMbus State An illegal STOP or bus error Clear STO. 0 X X was detected while a Slave Transmission was in progress. 0 0 X A slave address + R/W was received; ACK sent. Slave Receiver 0010 0 Bus Error Condition Lost arbitration as master; 1 X slave address + R/W received; If Read, Load SMB0DAT with ACK sent. data byte 0 A STOP was detected while 0 X addressed as a Slave Transmitter or Slave Receiver. 0 1 X 0001 0000 Typical Response Options 0 0 X A slave byte was received. ACK ACK 0101 ARBLOST Status Vector 0100 ACKRQ Slave Transmitter Mode Values Read Next Status Vector Expected Table 28.6. SMBus Status Decoding With Hardware ACK Generation Enabled (EHACK = 1) 0010 0 1 X Lost arbitration while attempt- Abort failed transfer. ing a repeated START. Reschedule failed transfer. 0001 0 1 X Lost arbitration due to a detected STOP. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 0000 0 1 X Lost arbitration while transmit- Abort failed transfer. ting a data byte as master. Reschedule failed transfer. 0 0 X — 1 0 X 1110 Rev. 1.0 401 C8051F96x 402 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 29. UART0 UART0 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART. Enhanced baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details in Section “29.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation” on page 403). Received data buffering allows UART0 to start reception of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data byte. UART0 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 0 (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer 0 (SBUF0). The single SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Writes to SBUF0 always access the Transmit register. Reads of SBUF0 always access the buffered Receive register; it is not possible to read data from the Transmit register. With UART0 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI0 is set in SCON0), or a data byte has been received (RI0 is set in SCON0). The UART0 interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually by software, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive complete). SFR Bus Write to SBUF TB8 SBUF (TX Shift) SET D Q TX CLR Crossbar Zero Detector Stop Bit Shift Start Data Tx Control Tx Clock Send Tx IRQ SCON TI Serial Port Interrupt MCE REN TB8 RB8 TI RI SMODE UART Baud Rate Generator Port I/O RI Rx IRQ Rx Clock Rx Control Start Shift 0x1FF Load SBUF RB8 Input Shift Register (9 bits) Load SBUF SBUF (RX Latch) Read SBUF SFR Bus RX Crossbar Figure 29.1. UART0 Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 402 C8051F96x 29.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation The UART0 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by TL1; the RX clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 29.2), which is not useraccessible. Both TX and RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates. The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer state. Timer 1 TL1 UART Overflow 2 TX Clock Overflow 2 RX Clock TH1 Start Detected RX Timer Figure 29.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload (see Section “32.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload” on page 447). The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that overflows will occur at two times the desired UART baud rate frequency. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked by one of six sources: SYSCLK, SYSCLK / 4, SYSCLK / 12, SYSCLK / 48, the external oscillator clock / 8, or an external input T1. For any given Timer 1 clock source, the UART0 baud rate is determined by Equation -A and Equation -B. A) 1 UartBaudRate = --- × T1_Overflow_Rate 2 B) T1 CLK T1_Overflow_Rate = -------------------------256 – TH1 UART0 Baud Rate Where T1CLK is the frequency of the clock supplied to Timer 1, and T1H is the high byte of Timer 1 (reload value). Timer 1 clock frequency is selected as described in Section “32.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on page 446. A quick reference for typical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Table 29.1 through Table 29.2. Note that the internal oscillator may still generate the system clock when the external oscillator is driving Timer 1. 403 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 29.2. Operational Modes UART0 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is selected by the S0MODE bit (SCON0.7). Typical UART connection options are shown below. TX RS-232 LEVEL XLTR RS-232 RX C8051Fxxx OR TX TX RX RX MCU C8051Fxxx Figure 29.3. UART Interconnect Diagram 29.2.1. 8-Bit UART 8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop bit. Data are transmitted LSB first from the TX0 pin and received at the RX0 pin. On receive, the eight data bits are stored in SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2). Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: RI0 must be logic 0, and if MCE0 is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data overrun, the first received 8 bits are latched into the SBUF0 receive register and the following overrun data bits are lost. If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB80 and the RI0 flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set. MARK SPACE START BIT D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 STOP BIT BIT TIMES BIT SAMPLING Figure 29.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram 29.2.2. 9-Bit UART 9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programmable ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the value in TB80 (SCON0.3), which is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in register PSW) for error detection, or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2) and the stop bit is ignored. Rev. 1.0 404 C8051F96x Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: (1) RI0 must be logic 0, and (2) if MCE0 is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE0 is logic 0, the state of the ninth data bit is unimportant). If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored in RB80, and the RI0 flag is set to 1. If the above conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set to 1. A UART0 interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set to 1. MARK SPACE START BIT D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 STOP BIT BIT TIMES BIT SAMPLING Figure 29.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram 29.3. Multiprocessor Communications 9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more slave processors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0. Setting the MCE0 bit (SCON0.5) of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is received, the UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic 1 (RB80 = 1) signifying an address byte has been received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received address with the slave's own assigned 8-bit address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE0 bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the following data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave their MCE0 bits set and do not generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes, thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed slave resets its MCE0 bit to ignore all transmissions until it receives the next address byte. Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master and slave(s). 405 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Master Device Slave Device Slave Device Slave Device V+ RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX Figure 29.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram Rev. 1.0 406 C8051F96x SFR Definition 29.1. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control Bit 7 6 Name S0MODE Type R/W Reset 0 5 4 3 2 1 0 MCE0 REN0 TB80 RB80 TI0 RI0 R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0x98; Bit-Addressable Bit 7 Name Function S0MODE Serial Port 0 Operation Mode. Selects the UART0 Operation Mode. 0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate. 1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate. 6 Unused 5 MCE0 Read = 1b. Write = Don’t Care. Multiprocessor Communication Enable. For Mode 0 (8-bit UART): Checks for valid stop bit. 0: Logic level of stop bit is ignored. 1: RI0 will only be activated if stop bit is logic level 1. For Mode 1 (9-bit UART): Multiprocessor Communications Enable. 0: Logic level of ninth bit is ignored. 1: RI0 is set and an interrupt is generated only when the ninth bit is logic 1. 4 REN0 Receive Enable. 0: UART0 reception disabled. 1: UART0 reception enabled. 3 TB80 Ninth Transmission Bit. The logic level of this bit will be sent as the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode (Mode 1). Unused in 8-bit mode (Mode 0). 2 RB80 Ninth Receive Bit. RB80 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th data bit in Mode 1. 1 TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag. Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in 8-bit UART Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. 0 RI0 Receive Interrupt Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (set at the STOP bit sampling time). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to 1 causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. 407 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 29.2. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer Bit 7 6 5 Name 4 3 2 1 0 SBUF0[7:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0x99 Bit Name 7:0 SBUF0 Function Serial Data Buffer Bits 7:0 (MSB–LSB). This SFR accesses two registers; a transmit shift register and a receive latch register. When data is written to SBUF0, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial transmission. Writing a byte to SBUF0 initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF0 returns the contents of the receive latch. Rev. 1.0 408 C8051F96x Table 29.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using The Internal 24.5 MHz Oscillator SYSCLK from Internal Osc. Frequency: 24.5 MHz Target Baud Rate (bps) Baud Rate % Error Oscillator Divide Factor Timer Clock Source SCA1–SCA0 (pre-scale select)1 T1M1 Timer 1 Reload Value (hex) 230400 –0.32% 106 SYSCLK XX2 1 0xCB 115200 –0.32% 212 SYSCLK XX 1 0x96 57600 0.15% 426 SYSCLK XX 1 0x2B 28800 –0.32% 848 SYSCLK/4 01 0 0x96 14400 0.15% 1704 SYSCLK/12 00 0 0xB9 9600 –0.32% 2544 SYSCLK/12 00 0 0x96 2400 –0.32% 10176 SYSCLK/48 10 0 0x96 1200 0.15% 20448 SYSCLK/48 10 0 0x2B SCA1–SCA0 (pre-scale select)1 T1M1 Timer 1 Reload Value (hex) Notes: 1. SCA1–SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 32.1. 2. X = Don’t care. Table 29.2. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External 22.1184 MHz Oscillator SYSCLK from External Osc. Frequency: 22.1184 MHz 409 Target Baud Rate (bps) Baud Rate % Error Oscilla- Timer Clock tor Divide Source Factor 230400 0.00% 96 SYSCLK XX2 1 0xD0 115200 0.00% 192 SYSCLK XX 1 0xA0 57600 0.00% 384 SYSCLK XX 1 0x40 28800 0.00% 768 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0xE0 14400 0.00% 1536 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0xC0 9600 0.00% 2304 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0xA0 2400 0.00% 9216 SYSCLK / 48 10 0 0xA0 1200 0.00% 18432 SYSCLK / 48 10 0 0x40 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x Table 29.2. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using an External 22.1184 MHz Oscillator SYSCLK from Internal Osc. Frequency: 22.1184 MHz SCA1–SCA0 (pre-scale select)1 T1M1 Timer 1 Reload Value (hex) EXTCLK / 8 11 0 0xFA 192 EXTCLK / 8 11 0 0xF4 0.00% 384 EXTCLK / 8 11 0 0xE8 28800 0.00% 768 EXTCLK / 8 11 0 0xD0 14400 0.00% 1536 EXTCLK / 8 11 0 0xA0 9600 0.00% 2304 EXTCLK / 8 11 0 0x70 Target Baud Rate (bps) Baud Rate % Error Oscilla- Timer Clock tor Divide Source Factor 230400 0.00% 96 115200 0.00% 57600 Notes: 1. SCA1–SCA0 and T1M bit definitions can be found in Section 32.1. 2. X = Don’t care. Rev. 1.0 410 C8051F96x 411 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x 30. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) The Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) provides access to a flexible, full-duplex synchronous serial bus. SPI0 can operate as a master or slave device in both 3-wire or 4-wire modes, and supports multiple masters and slaves on a single SPI bus. The slave-select (NSS) signal can be configured as an input to select SPI0 in slave mode, or to disable Master Mode operation in a multi-master environment, avoiding contention on the SPI bus when more than one master attempts simultaneous data transfers. NSS can also be configured as a chip-select output in master mode, or disabled for 3-wire operation. Additional general purpose port I/O pins can be used to select multiple slave devices in master mode. SFR Bus SYSCLK SPI0CN SPIBSY MSTEN CKPHA CKPOL SLVSEL NSSIN SRMT RXBMT SPIF WCOL MODF RXOVRN NSSMD1 NSSMD0 TXBMT SPIEN SPI0CFG SCR7 SCR6 SCR5 SCR4 SCR3 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0 SPI0CKR Clock Divide Logic SPI CONTROL LOGIC Data Path Control SPI IRQ Pin Interface Control MOSI Tx Data SPI0DAT SCK Transmit Data Buffer Shift Register 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Rx Data Pin Control Logic Receive Data Buffer MISO C R O S S B A R Port I/O NSS Read SPI0DAT Write SPI0DAT SFR Bus Figure 30.1. SPI Block Diagram Rev. 1.0 411 C8051F96x 30.1. Signal Descriptions The four signals used by SPI0 (MOSI, MISO, SCK, NSS) are described below. 30.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI) The master-out, slave-in (MOSI) signal is an output from a master device and an input to slave devices. It is used to serially transfer data from the master to the slave. This signal is an output when SPI0 is operating as a master and an input when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit first. When configured as a master, MOSI is driven by the MSB of the shift register in both 3- and 4-wire mode. 30.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO) The master-in, slave-out (MISO) signal is an output from a slave device and an input to the master device. It is used to serially transfer data from the slave to the master. This signal is an input when SPI0 is operating as a master and an output when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit first. The MISO pin is placed in a high-impedance state when the SPI module is disabled and when the SPI operates in 4-wire mode as a slave that is not selected. When acting as a slave in 3-wire mode, MISO is always driven by the MSB of the shift register. 30.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK) The serial clock (SCK) signal is an output from the master device and an input to slave devices. It is used to synchronize the transfer of data between the master and slave on the MOSI and MISO lines. SPI0 generates this signal when operating as a master. The SCK signal is ignored by a SPI slave when the slave is not selected (NSS = 1) in 4-wire slave mode. 30.1.4. Slave Select (NSS) The function of the slave-select (NSS) signal is dependent on the setting of the NSSMD1 and NSSMD0 bits in the SPI0CN register. There are three possible modes that can be selected with these bits: 1. NSSMD[1:0] = 00: 3-Wire Master or 3-Wire Slave Mode: SPI0 operates in 3-wire mode, and NSS is disabled. When operating as a slave device, SPI0 is always selected in 3-wire mode. Since no select signal is present, SPI0 must be the only slave on the bus in 3-wire mode. This is intended for pointto-point communication between a master and one slave. 2. NSSMD[1:0] = 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an input. When operating as a slave, NSS selects the SPI0 device. When operating as a master, a 1-to-0 transition of the NSS signal disables the master function of SPI0 so that multiple master devices can be used on the same SPI bus. 3. NSSMD[1:0] = 1x: 4-Wire Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an output. The setting of NSSMD0 determines what logic level the NSS pin will output. This configuration should only be used when operating SPI0 as a master device. See Figure 30.2, Figure 30.3, and Figure 30.4 for typical connection diagrams of the various operational modes. Note that the setting of NSSMD bits affects the pinout of the device. When in 3-wire master or 3-wire slave mode, the NSS pin will not be mapped by the crossbar. In all other modes, the NSS signal will be mapped to a pin on the device. See Section “27. Port Input/Output” on page 351 for general purpose port I/O and crossbar information. 30.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation A SPI master device initiates all data transfers on a SPI bus. SPI0 is placed in master mode by setting the Master Enable flag (MSTEN, SPI0CN.6). Writing a byte of data to the SPI0 data register (SPI0DAT) when in master mode writes to the transmit buffer. If the SPI shift register is empty, the byte in the transmit buffer is moved to the shift register, and a data transfer begins. The SPI0 master immediately shifts out the data serially on the MOSI line while providing the serial clock on SCK. The SPIF (SPI0CN.7) flag is set to logic 1 at the end of the transfer. If interrupts are enabled, an interrupt request is generated when the SPIF flag 412 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x is set. While the SPI0 master transfers data to a slave on the MOSI line, the addressed SPI slave device simultaneously transfers the contents of its shift register to the SPI master on the MISO line in a full-duplex operation. Therefore, the SPIF flag serves as both a transmit-complete and receive-data-ready flag. The data byte received from the slave is transferred MSB-first into the master's shift register. When a byte is fully shifted into the register, it is moved to the receive buffer where it can be read by the processor by reading SPI0DAT. When configured as a master, SPI0 can operate in one of three different modes: multi-master mode, 3-wire single-master mode, and 4-wire single-master mode. The default, multi-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In this mode, NSS is an input to the device, and is used to disable the master SPI0 when another master is accessing the bus. When NSS is pulled low in this mode, MSTEN (SPI0CN.6) and SPIEN (SPI0CN.0) are set to 0 to disable the SPI master device, and a Mode Fault is generated (MODF, SPI0CN.5 = 1). Mode Fault will generate an interrupt if enabled. SPI0 must be manually re-enabled in software under these circumstances. In multi-master systems, devices will typically default to being slave devices while they are not acting as the system master device. In multi-master mode, slave devices can be addressed individually (if needed) using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 30.2 shows a connection diagram between two master devices in multiple-master mode. 3-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. In this mode, NSS is not used, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Any slave devices that must be addressed in this mode should be selected using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 30.3 shows a connection diagram between a master device in 3-wire master mode and a slave device. 4-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 1. In this mode, NSS is configured as an output pin, and can be used as a slave-select signal for a single SPI device. In this mode, the output value of NSS is controlled (in software) with the bit NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2). Additional slave devices can be addressed using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 30.4 shows a connection diagram for a master device in 4-wire master mode and two slave devices. Rev. 1.0 413 C8051F96x Master Device 1 NSS GPIO MISO MISO MOSI MOSI SCK SCK GPIO NSS Master Device 2 Figure 30.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram Master Device MISO MISO MOSI MOSI SCK SCK Slave Device Figure 30.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram Master Device GPIO MISO MISO MOSI MOSI SCK SCK NSS NSS MISO MOSI Slave Device Slave Device SCK NSS Figure 30.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram 30.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation When SPI0 is enabled and not configured as a master, it will operate as a SPI slave. As a slave, bytes are shifted in through the MOSI pin and out through the MISO pin by a master device controlling the SCK signal. A bit counter in the SPI0 logic counts SCK edges. When 8 bits have been shifted through the shift register, the SPIF flag is set to logic 1, and the byte is copied into the receive buffer. Data is read from the receive buffer by reading SPI0DAT. A slave device cannot initiate transfers. Data to be transferred to the master device is pre-loaded into the shift register by writing to SPI0DAT. Writes to SPI0DAT are doublebuffered, and are placed in the transmit buffer first. If the shift register is empty, the contents of the transmit buffer will immediately be transferred into the shift register. When the shift register already contains data, 414 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x the SPI will load the shift register with the transmit buffer’s contents after the last SCK edge of the next (or current) SPI transfer. When configured as a slave, SPI0 can be configured for 4-wire or 3-wire operation. The default, 4-wire slave mode, is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In 4-wire mode, the NSS signal is routed to a port pin and configured as a digital input. SPI0 is enabled when NSS is logic 0, and disabled when NSS is logic 1. The bit counter is reset on a falling edge of NSS. Note that the NSS signal must be driven low at least 2 system clocks before the first active edge of SCK for each byte transfer. Figure 30.4 shows a connection diagram between two slave devices in 4-wire slave mode and a master device. 3-wire slave mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. NSS is not used in this mode, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Since there is no way of uniquely addressing the device in 3-wire slave mode, SPI0 must be the only slave device present on the bus. It is important to note that in 3-wire slave mode there is no external means of resetting the bit counter that determines when a full byte has been received. The bit counter can only be reset by disabling and reenabling SPI0 with the SPIEN bit. Figure 30.3 shows a connection diagram between a slave device in 3wire slave mode and a master device. 30.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources When SPI0 interrupts are enabled, the following four flags will generate an interrupt when they are set to logic 1: All of the following bits must be cleared by software.  The SPI Interrupt Flag, SPIF (SPI0CN.7) is set to logic 1 at the end of each byte transfer. This flag can occur in all SPI0 modes.  The Write Collision Flag, WCOL (SPI0CN.6) is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when the transmit buffer has not been emptied to the SPI shift register. When this occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written.This flag can occur in all SPI0 modes.  The Mode Fault Flag MODF (SPI0CN.5) is set to logic 1 when SPI0 is configured as a master, and for multi-master mode and the NSS pin is pulled low. When a Mode Fault occurs, the MSTEN and SPIEN bits in SPI0CN are set to logic 0 to disable SPI0 and allow another master device to access the bus.  The Receive Overrun Flag RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) is set to logic 1 when configured as a slave, and a transfer is completed and the receive buffer still holds an unread byte from a previous transfer. The new byte is not transferred to the receive buffer, allowing the previously received data byte to be read. The data byte which caused the overrun is lost. 30.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity Four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity can be selected using the clock control bits in the SPI0 Configuration Register (SPI0CFG). The CKPHA bit (SPI0CFG.5) selects one of two clock phases (edge used to latch the data). The CKPOL bit (SPI0CFG.4) selects between an active-high or active-low clock. Both master and slave devices must be configured to use the same clock phase and polarity. SPI0 should be disabled (by clearing the SPIEN bit, SPI0CN.0) when changing the clock phase or polarity. The clock and data line relationships for master mode are shown in Figure 30.5. For slave mode, the clock and data relationships are shown in Figure 30.6 and Figure 30.7. Note that CKPHA should be set to 0 on both the master and slave SPI when communicating between two Silicon Labs C8051 devices. The SPI0 Clock Rate Register (SPI0CKR) as shown in SFR Definition 30.3 controls the master mode serial clock frequency. This register is ignored when operating in slave mode. When the SPI is configured as a master, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) is one-half the system clock frequency or 12.5 MHz, whichever is slower. When the SPI is configured as a slave, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) for full-duplex operation is 1/10 the system clock frequency, provided that the master issues SCK, NSS (in 4- Rev. 1.0 415 C8051F96x wire slave mode), and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. If the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data asynchronously, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) must be less than 1/10 the system clock frequency. In the special case where the master only wants to transmit data to the slave and does not need to receive data from the slave (i.e. half-duplex operation), the SPI slave can receive data at a maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) of 1/4 the system clock frequency. This is provided that the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0) SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1) MISO/MOSI MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 NSS (Must Remain High in Multi-Master Mode) Figure 30.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=0) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=0) MOSI MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 MISO MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 NSS (4-Wire Mode) Figure 30.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0) 416 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SCK (CKPOL=0, CKPHA=1) SCK (CKPOL=1, CKPHA=1) MOSI MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 MISO MSB Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 0 NSS (4-Wire Mode) Figure 30.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1) 30.6. SPI Special Function Registers SPI0 is accessed and controlled through four special function registers in the system controller: SPI0CN Control Register, SPI0DAT Data Register, SPI0CFG Configuration Register, and SPI0CKR Clock Rate Register. The four special function registers related to the operation of the SPI0 Bus are described in the following figures. Rev. 1.0 417 C8051F96x SFR Definition 30.1. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPIBSY MSTEN CKPHA CKPOL SLVSEL NSSIN SRMT RXBMT Type R R/W R/W R/W R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xA1 Bit Name 7 SPIBSY Function SPI Busy. This bit is set to logic 1 when a SPI transfer is in progress (master or slave mode). 6 MSTEN Master Mode Enable. 0: Disable master mode. Operate in slave mode. 1: Enable master mode. Operate as a master. 5 CKPHA SPI0 Clock Phase. 0: Data centered on first edge of SCK period.* 1: Data centered on second edge of SCK period.* 4 CKPOL SPI0 Clock Polarity. 0: SCK line low in idle state. 1: SCK line high in idle state. 3 SLVSEL Slave Selected Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 whenever the NSS pin is low indicating SPI0 is the selected slave. It is cleared to logic 0 when NSS is high (slave not selected). This bit does not indicate the instantaneous value at the NSS pin, but rather a de-glitched version of the pin input. 2 NSSIN NSS Instantaneous Pin Input. This bit mimics the instantaneous value that is present on the NSS port pin at the time that the register is read. This input is not de-glitched. 1 SRMT Shift Register Empty (valid in slave mode only). This bit will be set to logic 1 when all data has been transferred in/out of the shift register, and there is no new information available to read from the transmit buffer or write to the receive buffer. It returns to logic 0 when a data byte is transferred to the shift register from the transmit buffer or by a transition on SCK. SRMT = 1 when in Master Mode. 0 RXBMT Receive Buffer Empty (valid in slave mode only). This bit will be set to logic 1 when the receive buffer has been read and contains no new information. If there is new information available in the receive buffer that has not been read, this bit will return to logic 0. RXBMT = 1 when in Master Mode. Note: In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is sampled one SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave device. See Table 30.1 for timing parameters. 418 Rev. 1.0 C8051F96x SFR Definition 30.2. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Name SPIF WCOL MODF RXOVRN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SPIF 1 0 NSSMD[1:0] TXBMT SPIEN R/W R R/W 1 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xF8; Bit-Addressable Bit Name 7 2 1 Function SPI0 Interrupt Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware at the end of a data transfer. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 6 WCOL Write Collision Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when TXBMT is 0. When this occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 5 MODF Mode Fault Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a master mode collision is detected (NSS is low, MSTEN = 1, and NSSMD[1:0] = 01). If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 4 RXOVRN Receive Overrun Flag (valid in slave mode only). This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when the receive buffer still holds unread data from a previous transfer and the last bit of the current transfer is shifted into the SPI0 shift register. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 3:2 NSSMD[1:0] Slave Select Mode. Selects between the following NSS operation modes: (See Section 30.2 and Section 30.3). 00: 3-Wire Slave or 3-Wire Master Mode. NSS signal is not routed to a port pin. 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode (Default). NSS is an input to the device. 1x: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS signal is mapped as an output from the device and will assume the value of NSSMD0. 1 TXBMT Transmit Buffer Empty. This bit will be set to logic 0 when new data has been written to the transmit buffer. When data in the transmit buffer is transferred to the SPI shift register, this bit will be set to logic 1, indicating that it is safe to write a new byte to the transmit buffer. 0 SPIEN SPI0 Enable. 0: SPI disabled. 1: SPI enabled. Rev. 1.0 419 C8051F96x SFR Definition 30.3. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate Bit 7 6 5 4 Name SCR[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 SFR Page = 0x0; SFR Address = 0xA2 Bit Name 7:0 SCR[7:0] 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Function SPI0 Clock Rate. These bits determine the frequency of the SCK output when the SPI0 module is configured for master mode operation. The SCK clock frequency is a divided version of the system clock, and is given in the following equation, where SYSCLK is the system clock frequency and SPI0CKR is the 8-bit value held in the SPI0CKR register. SYSCLK f SCK = ----------------------------------------------------------2 × ( SPI0CKR[7:0] + 1 ) for 0